Keyence IV Series

206GB
Vision Sensor
IV Series
Users Manual
(Monitor)
Read this manual before use.

After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
Getting Started
Installation and
Connection
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
Operating/Adjusting
Useful Features/
Various Functions
Controlling with
the Input/Output Line
Specifications
Status Table,
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

product damage as well as property damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

operation.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(2)
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible.
If there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the
manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks
of their respective companies.
Safety Information for IV Series
Safety Information for IV Series

General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyYou must verify that the IV Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance
before the start and the operation of the IV Series.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of
a problem occurring.
yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner that
differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV Series are
modified by yourself.
yyWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance
may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may
cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.
Safety precautions on LED product

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual.
Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
yyDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
yyDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not
automatically stopped when it is disassembled.
yyDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present.
yyBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed
to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure.
yyInstall this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human eye.
206GB
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to
ensure that it is used properly.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when
the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a
product damage.
yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or
part of the setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause
a malfunction.
yyThe enclosure rating of the monitor (IV-M30) is IP40. This is not designed for water proof so be
careful to operate it.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol.
Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit.
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable,
wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor an LCD panel
yyDo not press the touch panel with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as
a pen or a screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage.
yyDo not apply shock to the touch panel or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause
damage.
yyThe LCD panel may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always
unlit (black dots). This phenomenon is not a problem.
yyDue to the unique characteristics of an LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may
cause an afterimage.
yyFor USB memory
yyUse products recommended by KEYENCE.
yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used.
yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of IV Series.
yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of
the setting data may be lost or it may cause a damage.
yyFor external master image registration
When the external master image registration is used frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext.
Master Save?] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal
sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for
100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation.
This will not activate during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed
to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program,
set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] for extending the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may
cause a product damage.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal condition
could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV Series.
yyIf the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.
Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to
do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter.
yyGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor.
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic
field (such as solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC
power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground
terminal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/
IV-2000M/IV-2000MA
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E301717
yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A

EMS: EN60947-5-2
yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard: EN62471
For IV-M30
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E207185
yyCategory NRAQ, NRAQ7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyThis product is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure.
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN61326-1, Class A

EMS: EN61326-1
yyThe length of Monitor power cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
Version of the IV Series
Version of the IV Series

You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and the monitor
(IV-M30) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

Version
Description
R1.00.00
The initial version.
R1.01.00
The processing time has been speeded up.
R1.10.00
The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been
speeded up.
R2.00.00
This is the version of this document.

The following functions have been added.
yyLogic output
yyTotal status NG output
yyRUN output
yyFTP client function
yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)
Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)

Version
Description
R1.00.00
The initial version.
R1.01.01
Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
R1.02.00
Compatibility with German.
R1.10.00
Compatibility with Tool Auto Tuning using a registration information file (*.ivt).
R2.00.00
This is the version of this document.

Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.
Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual

1
Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configuration and overview

of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of
each part.
Installation and
Connection
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor,

and explains connection procedures.
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow

of the IV Series.
Settings Navigator
Operating/Adjusting
Useful Features/
Various Functions
Controlling with
the Input/Output Line
Specifications
Appendices
This chapter explains how to set the sensors using

the Settings Navigator.
1
2
3
4
5
This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.
This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals

control each operation.
This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Symbols
Cautions
Safety Information for IV Series..............................1
General Precautions............................................1
Safety precautions on LED product.....................1
Important Instructions..............................................2
Precautions on use..............................................2
Measures to be taken when an abnormality
occurs..................................................................3
Precautions on installation...................................3
Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA............4
UL Certification.................................................4
CE Marking.......................................................4
For IV-M30...........................................................5
UL Certification.................................................5
CE Marking.......................................................5
Version of the IV Series...........................................6
Operation software of the sensor
(IV-150/500/2000)................................................6
Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30).........6
Structure of This Manual.........................................7
Contents..................................................................8
Chapter 1 Getting Started

System Configuration...........................................1-2
Basic configurations of IV Series......................1-2
Connecting the monitor and single sensor....1-2
Connecting the monitor and
multiple sensors.............................................1-3
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4
IV Series...........................................................1-4
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-4
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-5
Judgment processing flow................................1-6
Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8
Sensor...............................................................1-8
Optional parts for the sensor.............................1-8
Dome attachment..........................................1-8
Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8
Infrared polarization filter attachment............1-8
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)....1-9
Mounting adapter...........................................1-9
Front cover (for replacement)........................1-9
Bracket..........................................................1-9
Intelligent Monitor............................................1-10
Optional parts for the monitor.........................1-10
Monitor power cable
(M8 4pin - strand wire).................................1-10
Protection sheet...........................................1-10
USB memory (1GB).....................................1-10
Stylus...........................................................1-10
Wall mounting adapter.................................1-11
Panel mounting adapter..............................1-11
DIN mounting adapter.................................1-11
Communication Cable.....................................1-12
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)...........1-12
8
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-12

Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13
Sensor.............................................................1-13
Name and function of each part of
the sensor............................................1-13
Operation of the indicator light.............1-14
Monitor............................................................1-15
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Checking the view and installed distance.........2-2
Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4
Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-4
Mounting on the wall..............................2-4
Mounting from the jig side......................2-4
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting

adapter..........................................................2-4
Unmounting the sensor.....................................2-5
Mounting the attachment..................................2-6
Using the dome attachment...........................2-6
Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6
Installed distance of the dome
attachment.............................................2-6
Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7
Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8
Mounting to a wall.............................................2-8
Hanging on the hook.....................................2-8
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter......2-8
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter....2-9
Mounting to a panel........................................2-10
Mounting to a panel.....................................2-10
Panel cutting dimension..............................2-10
Mounting to the DIN rail..................................2-11
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter........2-11
Unmounting from
the DIN mounting adapter...........................2-11
Cables................................................................2-12
Connecting the power I/O cable of
the sensor.......................................................2-12
Specification of I/O circuit and current of
the sensor.......................................................2-14
Input circuit..................................................2-14
No-voltage input
(When the NPN output is selected).....2-14

Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)......2-14

Output circuit...............................................2-14
When the NPN output is selected........2-14
When the PNP output is selected........2-14
Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-15

Connecting the sensor and the monitor..........2-16
Connecting directly......................................2-16
Connecting via network...............................2-16
Connecting the monitor cable/
Ethernet cable.............................................2-17
Contents
Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection)...........................................3-6
(Network Connection).......................................3-7
Setting the network address of the monitor....3-7
Searching for a sensor to be connected........3-8
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address........................................................3-10
Operation for initial startup of the sensor........3-11
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12
Initializing the sensor......................................3-12
Initializing the monitor.....................................3-13
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14
Editing the value with the slider......................3-14
Editing the tool window...................................3-15
Inputting characters........................................3-16
Selecting the file in the USB memory.............3-17
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow....4-4
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...........4-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5
Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5
Finishing without completing the step............4-5
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)....4-6
Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6
Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7
Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8
Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-10
Auto Brightness Adjustment............................4-11
Focus Adjustment...........................................4-12
Focus adjustment for
the auto focusing type.................................4-12
the manual focusing type.............................4-14
Extended functions for
the Image Optimization...................................4-16
Items of extended functions for
the Image Optimization................................4-16
Imaging Area...............................................4-17
Advanced Brightness Adjustment................4-18
Lighting........................................................4-18
Color Filters (color type only).......................4-19
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only).........4-19
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-20
Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-20
Registering the master image.........................4-21

the Master Registration...................................4-22
the Master Registration...............................4-22
Master image registration from
the image history in the sensor....................4-22
Registering from the image in
the USB memory.........................................4-24
When using a batch backup file
(*.iva)...................................................4-24
When using an image capture file
(*.ivp)...................................................4-25
Brightness correction...................................4-26
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28
Selecting a tool according to
its intended purpose........................................4-28
Types of tools..................................................4-28
Main screen for the Tool Settings....................4-30
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool.........................4-31
Adding a tool................................................4-31
Editing a tool................................................4-31
Deleting a tool..............................................4-31
Outline tool......................................................4-32
Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-32
Setting the Outline tool................................4-33
Setting a search region........................4-35
Settings for disabling outlines..............4-35
Setting a sensitivity..............................4-36
Extended functions for the Outline tool........4-37

Rotation Range....................................4-38
Search Algorithm.................................4-38
Tool Name............................................4-39
Color Area/Area tool........................................4-40

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool....4-40
Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-42
Mask settings.......................................4-45
Setting the upper limit..........................4-46
Extended functions of
the Color Area/Area tool..............................4-48
Advanced Color Extraction/
Advanced Brightness Extraction..........4-49

Tool Name............................................4-49
Fixed Reference Area..........................4-50
Position Adjustment tool..................................4-51

Setting items for
the Position Adjustment tool........................4-52
Setting the Position Adjustment tool............4-53
Setting a search region........................4-55
Settings for disabling outlines..............4-55
Setting a sensitivity..............................4-56

the Position Adjustment tool........................4-57
Rotation Range....................................4-57
Extended functions for the Tool settings.........4-58

the Tool settings...........................................4-58
Copy Tool.....................................................4-58
Contents
4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60
Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-60
Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-60
Default value........................................4-60
Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61

the Output Assignment....................................4-62
Extended functions items for
the Output Assignment................................4-62
Logic Settings......................................4-63
Total Status Conditions........................4-65
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Turning on the power and
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Exiting the sensor settings and
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen....5-4
Menu Screen.....................................................5-4
Switching the display to the full-screen mode....5-5
Enlarging the image display..............................5-6
Selecting the tool whose information to be
displayed...........................................................5-6
Selecting the tool from
the pull-down menu...............................5-6

Selecting the tool by tapping it on
the monitor.............................................5-6
Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7
Display methods for tools..............................5-7
For color type.........................................5-7
For monochrome type............................5-8
Displaying the statistical information...............5-10

Displaying the statistical information...........5-10
Hiding the statistical information..................5-11
Displaying the histogram.................................5-12
Displaying the histogram.............................5-12
Hiding the histogram....................................5-13
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15
Using the images taken in
the Test mode......................................5-15

Using the image history saved in
the sensor............................................5-15
Using the image files saved in
the USB memory.................................5-15

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning.....5-16
Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-18
Registering the images taken in
the Test mode..............................................5-18
Registering the images from
the image history saved in the sensor.........5-20
10

the file saved in the USB memory...............5-22
Confirming or deleting the images
registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-25
Tool Auto Tuning by
the previous registration information...............5-26
Tool Auto Tuning by
the registration information file........................5-28
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
Stabilizing the judgment process by
taking a clear image of the target....................5-32
Imaging the target widely.............................5-32
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-32
Using the digital zooming function.......5-32
Correcting the distorted images due to

the installation..............................................5-33
Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-33
If the brightness cannot be adjusted
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment.......5-33

due to uneven brightness....................5-33

Achieving good focus..................................5-34
If good focus cannot be achieved by
the Auto Focus Adjustment..................5-34

Reducing the image blur..............................5-34
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or
metal surface...............................................5-35
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment....5-35
Using the dome attachment.................5-35
Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-35
Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-35
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)....5-36

Reducing the effect of
illumination variation....................................5-36
Stabilizing by correcting
the misaligned target position.........................5-36
Tool settings.........................................5-36
Processing during an operation...........5-36
Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-37

Basic adjustments................................5-37
If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable.............5-37

If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of

the unwanted outlines..........................5-37
If the outline of the reference target
cannot be detected..............................5-38
Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-38
If the outline cannot be detected
when the target becomes

out of position......................................5-38
If the detection becomes unstable
due to the effect of the unwanted

outline other than the target.................5-38
If the target tilts and the outline
cannot be detected..............................5-39
If the match rate difference
between the high and

low-quality-targets is small...................5-39
Contents
If the outline of the target cannot
be detected..........................................5-39
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-39
If the color you wish to judge cannot
be extracted.........................................5-39
If the area search becomes
unstable due to unwanted colors

being extracted....................................5-39
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40
For the processing time..................................5-40
Flow of the internal process.................5-40
Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-41

Selecting the tool............................................5-41
Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-41
Shortening the processing time of
the Outline tool............................................5-41
the Color Area/Area tool..............................5-42
the position adjustment................................5-42
Chapter 6
Useful Features/Various Functions
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2
Useful features while running............................6-2
Useful features during installation/adjustment....6-4
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8
Overview of the program functions...................6-8
Things can be performed with
the program functions.......................................6-8
Preparing the program functions.......................6-9
Preparation flow.............................................6-9
Preparation procedures.................................6-9
Using the program functions
(changing over)...............................................6-10
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
the Program Switch Method........................6-10
When the [External IN] is selected in
the Program Switch Method........................6-11
Editing a program name..................................6-12
Copying a program.........................................6-12
Initializing a program.......................................6-13
Sensor Image History (Confirming
the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-14
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen....6-14
Displaying from the run screen............6-14
Displaying from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-14

Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-15
Clearing the saved images.............................6-16
Changing the logging conditions of
the image history.............................................6-17
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
a USB Memory...................................................6-18
Installing/Removing the USB memory............6-18
Installing the USB memory..........................6-18
Removing the USB memory........................6-18
Displaying the USB Memory screen...............6-18

Displaying from the run screen............6-18
Displaying from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-18

Saving the sensor settings or
the image history.............................................6-19
Backing up in a batch..................................6-19
Saving the image history individually...........6-20
Transferring the settings backed up in
the USB memory to the sensor.......................6-21
Capturing the monitor screen and
saving to the USB memory.............................6-23
Enabling the screen capturing function.......6-23
Capturing the screen...................................6-23
Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-24
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25
Sensor advanced settings...............................6-25
Environmental..............................................6-25
Setup Adjustment........................................6-25
Program.......................................................6-25
System.........................................................6-25
I/O Settings.....................................................6-26
Input Settings...............................................6-26
Output Settings............................................6-27
Polarity.........................................................6-28
I/O Monitor...................................................6-28
Device settings................................................6-29
Device Name...............................................6-29
Password Lock............................................6-30
Network Settings.............................................6-31
Advanced Network Settings............................6-32
FTP..............................................................6-32
FTP Destination Settings.....................6-33
Transfer Condition Settings.................6-34
Transfer Destination Folder Settings....6-35
Field Network...............................................6-37
Tilt Correction..................................................6-38
Rotate 180.....................................................6-40
White Balance (for color type only).................6-41
Program Switch Method..................................6-42
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
(auto focus type only)......................................6-42
Sensor Information..........................................6-43
Initializing the sensor......................................6-44
Updating the sensor........................................6-44
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45
Monitor Settings..............................................6-45
Sensor Connect...........................................6-45
Monitor Device Settings...............................6-45
Monitor Environment...................................6-45
System.........................................................6-45
Sensor Connect..............................................6-46
When directly connecting with the sensor...6-46
When connecting with the sensor
via a network...............................................6-46
Network Settings.............................................6-48
Display Settings..............................................6-49
Touch Screen Lock.........................................6-50
Language........................................................6-51
Time................................................................6-51
11
Contents
Backlight.........................................................6-52
Touch Panel Calibration..................................6-52
Monitor Information.........................................6-53
Initialize Monitor..............................................6-53
Update Monitor...............................................6-53
Chapter 7
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2
External trigger..................................................7-2
Internal trigger...................................................7-3
Operating in the shortest cycle......................7-3
Importing the Status Output.................................7-4
Importing the total status /
total status NG output.......................................7-4
Importing the individual status output of
each detection tool / logic.................................7-5
Changing the timing of the status output..........7-6
Cancelling One-Shot output..........................7-6
Changing Over.....................................................7-7
Registering the Master Image..............................7-8
Clearing Errors...................................................7-10
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on...........................................................7-11
Input Response Time.........................................7-12
Response time for the switch program
input.............................................................7-12
Response time for the external master
registration input..........................................7-12
Response time for the error clear input.......7-12
Description for symbols...............................7-12
Chapter 8 Specifications
Specifications.......................................................8-2
Sensor...............................................................8-2
Intelligent Monitor..............................................8-4
Dimensions...........................................................8-6
Sensor...............................................................8-6
Optional parts for the sensor.............................8-7
Dome attachment..........................................8-7
Polarizing filter attachment............................8-8
Power I/O cable.............................................8-8
Mounting adapter...........................................8-8
Front cover....................................................8-8
Bracket..........................................................8-9
Intelligent Monitor............................................8-10
Optional parts for the monitor.........................8-12
Monitor power cable....................................8-12
Protection sheet...........................................8-12
Stylus...........................................................8-12
Wall mounting adapter.................................8-12
Panel mounting adapter..............................8-12
DIN mounting adapter.................................8-12
Connection Cable...........................................8-13
Monitor cable...............................................8-13
Ethernet cable.............................................8-13
12
Appendices
Status Table......................................................... A-2
Status table...................................................... A-2
Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result
at the time of position adjustment.................... A-4
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5
Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5
Settings List......................................................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display OFF)..................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display ON)...................... A-6
Sensor Setup Menu screen............................. A-7
Monitor Settings screen................................... A-9
Sensor Advanced screen............................... A-11
Sensor Setup screen..................................... A-14
1. Image Optimization................................. A-14
2. Master Registration................................ A-15
3. Tool Settings........................................... A-15
4. Output Assignment................................. A-18
Troubleshooting................................................. A-19
Error Messages................................................. A-22
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor.... A-22
Confirming error messages of the monitor..... A-24
Remedy when the Monitor cannot
be Connected with the Sensor.......................... A-28
Remedy when direct connection is
unavailable..................................................... A-28
Remedy when connection via
a network is unavailable................................. A-29
Confirming the status by observing
the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-32
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-32
STATUS indicator light................................ A-33
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor..... A-34
Other methods of confirming a network
connection...................................................... A-35
Confirming the existence of
the sensor from the monitor........................ A-35
If the displayed confirmation
result is NG....................................... A-35

Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the monitor.................................................. A-36
the sensor................................................... A-37
Confirming the router settings.................... A-37
Remedy when data transfer via
FTP is unavailable...................................... A-38
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40
Settings after initialization.............................. A-40
Connecting method after initialization............ A-40
For direct connection.......................... A-40
For network connection...................... A-40
Initializing the network settings...................... A-40
Contents
Maintenance...................................................... A-41
Attaching the protection sheet....................... A-41
Replacing the front cover............................... A-41
Index.................................................................. A-42
13
Contents
MEMO
14
1
System Configuration........................................1-2
Overview of IV Series.........................................1-4
Checking the Package Contents.......................1-8
Name and Function of Each Part....................1-13
1-1
1
Getting Started
Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configurations

and overview of IV Series, how to check package
contents, and the name and function of each part.
System Configuration
1
Basic configurations of IV Series
Getting Started
Connecting the monitor and single sensor

IV Series
Simulator
(IV-Navigator)
Intelligent Monitor
IV-M30
IVP-Converter
Monitor power cable

(2m/5m/10m)
Monitor cable
(2m/5m/10m/20m)
Eth
ern
Sensor
IV-500C
IV-500CA
IV-500M
IV-500MA
IV-150M
IV-150MA
IV-2000M
IV-2000MA
et
co
mm
un
USB memory
ica
tio
n
Power I/O cable

(2m/5m/10m)
(Optional)
Dome attachment
IV-D10
Polarizing filter attachment
OP-87436/OP-87437
DC24V power
Photoelectric/
Indicator light/buzzer etc.
proximity sensor etc.
Alarm can be output by the
Sends the signal to the trigger
status output function.
input when the target is detected.
1-2
PLC
PLC can control the trigger input
and the status output function, and
can switch the program number.
Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors
Ethernet switch
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
1-3
Getting Started
When the network is connected, the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) can be connected by selecting a single
sensor from among multiple sensors.
* Each sensor requires the power I/O cable.
* IV-M30 requires the power cable.
* A single monitor cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time.
Overview of IV Series
1
IV Series
Getting Started
The IV Series is an all-in-one Vision Sensor featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor
can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a
photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.
Operation condition settings require the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently.
The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with
multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

Direct connection
zz
Power I/O
Network connection
zz
Functions of monitor
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the
operation screen
yyMonitoring the
statistical information
yyReading the image
history
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history
1-4
Ethernet switch
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
Getting Started
The IV-Navigator has the same functions as the intelligent monitor (IV-M30).
For details of operations using the IV-Navigator, refer to IV Series User's Manual (PC Software).
Direct connection
zz
Network connection
zz
Functions of IV-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yyMonitoring the statistical
information
yyReading the image history
yySimulator
Power I/O
Ethernet switch
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history
1-5
Judgment processing flow
Getting Started
This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Trigger input
BUSY output
Total status
output
Trigger input
Imaging
Tool processing
Status output
Save images
1-6
Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an
internal trigger function.
Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the
CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.
According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.
Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned
positions of the target can be corrected by using the
position adjustment tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output
function turns OFF.
Outputs the status results.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output
is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG
output is ON.
Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

Conditions for saving the image can be selected from NG
only or All.
Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type
can save 300 images.
MEMO
1
Getting Started
1-7
Checking the Package Contents

1
Getting Started
IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed
for each model you purchased before using.
Sensor
yyIV-500C
yyIV-500CA
yyIV-150M
yyIV-150MA
yyIV-500M
yyIV-500MA
yyIV-2000M
yyIV-2000MA
Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1
Mounting adapter x 1
Screw for mounting
adapter x 1
Flathead screwdriver x 1
(Manual focus type only)
Sensor x 1
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the
default factory setting.
Instruction Manual x 1
Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-13)

Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2)
Cables (Page 2-12)
Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
Mounting screw x 2
Hexagon wrench
(L-shaped) x 1
Dome attachment x 1
Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)
Polarized visible light filter attachment
Infrared polarization filter attachment
yyOP-87436
yyOP-87437
Mounting screw x 2
Mounting screw x 2
Polarized visible light

filter attachment x 1
Infrared polarization
filter attachment x 1
Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)
Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)
1-8
Front cover (for replacement)
yyOP-87440 (2m)
yyOP-87441 (5m)
yyOP-87442 (10m)
yyOP-87461
1
Getting Started
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)
Mounting screw x 2
Front cover (for

replacement) x 1
O-shaped ring
(Small x 2, Large x 1)
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1
Mounting adapter
Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1
yyOP-87460
Screw for the mounting
adapter x 1
Mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for the sensor.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.
Optional parts for replacement.

Replacing the front cover (Page A-41)
Bracket
yyOP-87685
Bracket A x 1
Screw for the bracket and

nut x 1
Mounting screw x 4
Bracket B x 1
1-9
Intelligent Monitor
Getting Started
yyIV-M30
Stylus x 1
String for hanging the stylus x 1
Monitor x 1
Wall mounting adapter x 1

Screw for the adapter x 2
Hexagon nut x 2
Starting Guide x 1
Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-13)

Mounting the Monitor (Page 2-8)
Cables (Page 2-12)
Optional parts for the monitor

Monitor power cable
(M8 4pin - strand wire)
USB memory (1GB)

yyOP-87502
yyOP-87443 (2m)
yyOP-87444 (5m)
yyOP-87445 (10m)
USB memory x 1
Stylus
yyOP-87462
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)
String for hanging the

stylus x 1
Protection sheet
yyOP-87463
Stylus x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.
Protection sheet x 1
Attaching the protection sheet (Page A-41)
1-10
Wall mounting adapter
Getting Started
yyOP-87464
Screw for the adapter x 2

Hexagon nut x 2
Wall mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.
Panel mounting adapter

yyOP-87465
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

Mounting screw (front) x 4
Panel mounting
adapter x 1
Mounting to a panel (Page 2-10)
DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2
DIN mounting
adapter x 1
Mounting to the DIN rail (Page 2-11)
1-11
Communication Cable
Getting Started
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
yyOP-87450 (2m)
yyOP-87451 (5m)
yyOP-87452 (10m)
yyOP-87453 (20m)
yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87458 (5m)
yyOP-87459 (10m)
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x 1
1-12
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
Name and Function of Each Part

Sensor
sensor
1
2
3
4
2 Connector for power I/O cable

Connector for connecting the power I/O cable.
Use this for supplying the power to the sensor
and for connecting with external devices.
Cables (Page 2-12)
3 Focusing position adjustment screw
(manual focus type only)
Adjusts the focus of the displayed image.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable
Connector for connecting a monitor cable or
Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the
monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.
Cables (Page 2-12)
7
8
When the cable is not connected, attach

the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector
to maintain enclosure rating.
Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
5 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
Operation of the indicator light (Page 1-14)
6 Built-in light
LED light that illuminates the target
7 Camera
Images the object.
8 Front cover
Protects the camera and built-in lights.
The front cover is protected by the protection
sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove
the sheet when the sensor is to be used.
Front cover for replacement is provided for
maintenance.
Replacing the front cover (Page A-41)
1-13
1
Getting Started
Name and function of each part of the
1 Mounting adapter
Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor.
Operation of the indicator light
Getting Started
Details on operations of the indicator light are

shown below.
4
1 2 3
1 PWR/ERR
Indicates the power supplying status to the
sensor and the error status of the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Operating.
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation
is stopped. Blinks once a
second.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has
occurred.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has
occurred.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
Adjusting the focusing position
(manual focus only).
For countermeasures when an error occurred,
refer to
Error Messages (Page A-22).
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is OK.
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is NG.
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the first
judge finishes after starting the
operation or after switching
the program number.
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).

the manual focusing type
(Page 4-14)
1-14
3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
input of the internal or external trigger.
4 STATUS
Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
but the sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
Sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).

Focus adjustment for the
manual focusing type (Page 4-14)
When the sensor cannot correctly connect with
the monitor, refer to
Remedy when the
Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
(Page A-28).
5 LINK/ACT
Indicates the linking status within monitor or
Ethernet switch.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
is sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
Monitor
4
5
6
7
8
1
10
1 Power connector
Connects the monitor power cable.
Cables (Page 2-12)
2 Connector for the monitor cable/Ethernet
cable
Connector for connecting the monitor cable or
Ethernet cable. Used when connecting with the
sensor or Ethernet switch.
Cables (Page 2-12)
3 Unlock button
Push this button when dismounting the monitor from
the wall mounting adapter or DIN mounting adapter.
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter
(Page 2-9)
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter
(Page 2-11)
For countermeasures when an error occurred,

Error Messages (Page A-22).
refer to
5 Indicator light (SENSOR)
Indicates the connecting status to the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the
sensor.
....Linked normally but it is not
yyGreen
(Slowly blinks) properly connected to the
sensor.
yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected
because it did not link
normally.
If the monitor cannot correctly connect with the
Remedy when the Monitor
sensor, refer to
cannot be Connected with the Sensor (Page A-28).
6 LCD monitor/Stylus
Displays the operation screen and setup screen.
Operates by touching the screen with the stylus.
7 USB connecting connector
Connector for connecting the USB memory.
Connector is protected by the cover.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory (Page 6-18)
8 Stylus
Used to operate the touch-screen.
9 Stylus holder
Stores the stylus.
10 Strap holder
Holds the strap or hangs the stylus.
1-15
1
Getting Started
4 Indicator light (PWR)

Indicates the operating status of the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error occurred
to the sensor or monitor.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error occurred to
the sensor or monitor.
(OFF)................
y
The power is turned OFF.
y
MEMO
1
Getting Started
1-16
2
Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2

Mounting the Monitor.........................................2-8
Cables................................................................2-12
2-1
2
Installation and Connection
Installation and
Connection
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and

monitor, and explains connection procedures.
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor
2
yyGround (functional ground) the drain cable

(FG) of the power I/O cable.
yyMount and insulate the sensor. Use the
attached mounting adapter to insulate.
Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor
is not insulated, the electric potential and
noises may cause a damage or malfunction.
yyDo not place the sensor in the environment
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance
to the environment, or environment that
propagates the vibration directly to the
sensor. Those may cause a damage or
malfunction.
Checking the view and installed

distance
For IV Series, installed distance between the view
and object is different depending on the type of the
sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used
and its view, and place it in the proper distance.
View H
yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing

position after installed. Reserve the enough
space to adjust and install it.
yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable
the position or direction adjustment of the
sensor by installing the adjustment system at
the sensor mounting area.
yyView and optical axis have individual differences.
Adjust the position by checking the actual image
at the time of installation.
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
light changes. Use the shield to protect when the
location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out
the internal light or the view of the sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable due to the
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each
other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use
the shield to avoid interference.
2-2
View V
Indicator light
Installed distance
WD
View V = View H x 0.75
(H : V = 4 : 3)
The indicator light of

the sensor side is the
front surface of an
image.
Mounting the Sensor
Standard range type (color/monochrome)

zz
500
Installed distance WD (mm)
600
400
300
200
150
100
50
0
25
50 70
100 130 150
200
210
250
View H (mm)
Short range type

zz
150
100
50
10 12
20
30
36
40
View H (mm)
Long range type

zz
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
300
0
45
100
200
300
400
View H (mm)
The value of View H and V will be a half of the

value on the figures above when using the digital
zooming function (monochrome type only).
2-3
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the sensor
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting

adapter
Mounting the mounting adapter
Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460)

to mount the sensor.
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors
in the default factory setting. Remove it from the
sensor.
Unmounting the sensor (Page 2-5)
Mounting on the wall
yyScrew : M3 x 4
Use the commercially available screws which
have head thickness of 3 mm or lower.
yyTightening torque : 1.0 Nm or lower
Mounting from the jig side
yyScrew : M4 x 4
Use the commercially available screws.
1 Mount the sensor to the left and right

stopper on the mounting adapter.
Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the

indicator light.
Indicator light
Push the sensor to the

stopper of the fixing screw
Push until you hear the clicking sound from

the both side stoppers
2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor

using the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 1
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to

Dimensions (Page 8-6).
Remove the
protection sheet
2-4
Mounting the Sensor
Unmounting the sensor
1 Dismount the screw.
2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting

adapter and unmount the sensor.
Pull out the

stopper
2-5
Mounting the Sensor
2 Fix the dome attachment with attached
Mounting the attachment

Using the dome attachment
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
installation distance. Failure to do so may lose
the effect of the dome attachment.
yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
mounted.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the dome attachment mounted.
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-41)
Mounting the dome attachment
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the
concave part of the dome attachment with

the mounting screw of the front cover of
the sensor.
Front cover
mounting screw
Concave part
2-6
Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Installed distance of the dome
attachment
62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor

(0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment)
Sensor type
yyStandard range type
yyShort range type
Installed distance
from the front face
of the sensor
Concave part
62 to 112 mm
Dome attachment can be used for the standard

range type and short range type sensor.
yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2

Use the attached dedicated screws.
(0 to 50 mm)
dedicated screws.
Target
Mounting the Sensor
Using the polarizing filter attachment
the attached dedicated screws.
yyScrew : M2.5 x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
Remove the protection

sheet (blue)
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the
concave part of the polarizing filter

attachment with the mounting screw of
the front cover of the sensor.
Front cover
mounting screw
Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Concave part
Concave part
2-7
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyThere are the polarized visible light filter
attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared
polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use
the correct polarization filter attachment in
accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light.
Failure to do so may lose the effect.
yyAdjust the brightness with the polarization filter
attachment mounted.
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the polarization filter attachment mounted.
2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with
Mounting the Monitor

Mounting to a wall
2
Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP87464).

Hang it on the hook with the wall mounting adapter
mounted to the monitor, or mount the monitor to the
wall mounting adapter mounted on the wall.
Hanging on the hook

For operation take the monitor from the hook and
operate it while holding it in your hands.
1 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall

mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.
Mounting with the wall mounting

adapter
The monitor can be operated by the following
methods.
yyUnhang to pick up the monitor from the hook and
operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.
1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.
Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall

zz
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use commercially available screws.
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm

that the monitor is locked.
Mounting by creating a plated through

zz
hole on the panel
yyScrew : M3 x 2, Nut : M3 x 2
Use the attached screws and nuts.
Stopper
2 Hang the monitor on the hook.
2-8
2 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall

mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.
Unlock the monitor from the wall mounting adapter

by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper
2-9
2
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm

that the monitor is locked.
Unmounting from the wall mounting

adapter
3 Mount the monitor with the panel adapter
Mounting to a panel
mounted to the control board from the

rear side, and fix it with the screws.
Mounting to a panel
1 Connect the power cable and monitor

cable to the monitor.
Cables (Page 2-12)
2 Mount the panel adapter to the monitor

and fix it with the attached screws.
Strap holder
yyScrew : M3, 11 mm long, with 2 washers

Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using

the hanging string (accessory).
Panel cutting dimension

(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
100
110
(Circular hole position for screw)
2-10
4-3.5
(Circular hole position for screw)
111 +1
-0
92 +1
-0
yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm

yyScrew : M3, 7 mm long, with 4 washers
(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
Operate the monitor by mounting it to the panel

side such as a control board.
Mount the panel adapter (OP-87465) to the monitor,
and mount it to the panel.
2 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting
Mounting to the DIN rail
adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down

the stopper of the adapter, and then push
up the stopper to lock it.
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter
1 Mount the monitor to the DIN mounting

adapter.
Slide the monitor until the end of the stopper,

and confirm that the monitor is locked.
Stopper
Unmounting from the DIN mounting

adapter
Unlock the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter
by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper
Fixing to the DIN mounting adapter

zz
To fix the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter,
use the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use the attached flat head screw.
2
Mount the DIN mounting adapter (OP-87466) to the

monitor, and mount it to the DIN rail.
The monitor can be operated by the following methods.
yyPick up the monitor from the DIN mounting
adapter and operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the DIN rail.
2-11
Cables
Cables
Connecting the power I/O cable of

the sensor
1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the
power I/O cable and pin connection of the

cable connector, and connect the cable to
the sensor.
3 Wire each cable according to its intended

purpose.
Selecting NPN output

zz
When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11)
External device
Brown (DC24V)
Black/White/
Gray/Orange
(OUT)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/
Green/Red
(IN)
Adjust the pins and the

pin connection
Load
IN
DC24V
OUT
(NPN)
Blue (0V)
Drain wire (FG)
2 Tighten the connector by turning the screwon connector in the clockwise direction.
Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0

to 1.5 Nm.
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use it by assigning the optional function
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
Selecting PNP output

zz
When PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11)

Brown (DC24V)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/
Green/Red
(IN)
Black/White/
Gray/Orange
(OUT)
Blue (0V)
When connecting the connector, insert it

without tipping and tighten it well. If the
tightening is weak, vibration can loosen
the connector and cause bad connections.
Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
* Indication is retighten approximately
90 to 120 with tools such as pliers
after tightening with hands.
2-12
External device
(PNP)
OUT
DC24V
IN
Load
Drain wire (FG)
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use it by assigning the optional function
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
Cables
Wiring
color
Name
Assigning
default value
Brown
DC24V
+ side of power
Blue
0V
- side of power
GND of input-output cable
Black
OUT1
Total Status (N.O.)
White
OUT2
BUSY (N.O.)
Gray
OUT3
Error (N.O.)
Orange
OUT4
OFF
Pink
IN1
External trigger
Yellow
IN2
OFF
Light Blue
IN3
OFF
Purple
IN4
OFF
Green
IN5
OFF
Red
IN6
OFF
Drain
FG
Description
2
Output assignable function

yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4)
yyOFF (not used)
Set external trigger.
Rising timing () or falling timing () can be set.
Input assignable function
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save
yyOFF (not used)
Insulated frame
Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25

yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28
yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)
yyThe output cable assignment can be changed.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
Output Settings (Page 6-27)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
Input Settings (Page 6-26)
yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output).
For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.
2-13
Cables
Specification of I/O circuit and

current of the sensor
No-voltage input (When the NPN
output is selected)
+3.3V
Brown
DC24V
Brown
Main circuit
0V
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
Voltage input (When the PNP output is
selected)
When the PNP output is selected
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output
circuit.
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
DC24V
Brown
Main circuit
0V
Blue
IN1 - IN6
0V
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
to OUT4
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
2-14
OUT1 - OUT4
Load
Brown
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
to OUT4
Overcurrent protection circuit
DC24V
Blue
Main circuit
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
: 15 V or higher
yyON voltage
: 2 mA (for 24V)
yyON current
: 0.2 mA or lower
yyOFF current
OUT1 - OUT4
0V
IN1 - IN6
Load
DC24V
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output
circuit.
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
Overcurrent protection circuit
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit.
External power supply is not necessary.
: 2 V or lower
yyON voltage
: 0.1 mA or lower
yyOFF current
: 2 mA (short circuit)
yyON current
When the NPN output is selected
Main circuit
Input circuit
Output circuit
Cables
Connecting the power cable of

the monitor
Align the arrow mark of the power cable

and the direction of the front monitor, and
connect the cable to the monitor.
3 Wire to the power supply.
Brown (DC24V)
Monitor power cable
(2m/5m/10m)
Blue (0V)
DC24V
Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24
Arrow mark
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the

clockwise direction to tighten it.
2-15
Cables
Connecting the sensor and the

monitor
Connecting directly
Connect the sensor and monitor using the monitor
cable.
Connecting via network

Connect each Ethernet cable to the monitor and
sensor.
Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the
Ethernet switch.
Ethernet switch
Monitor cable
(2m/5m/10m/20m)
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
For details on connecting the monitor cable, refer to

Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-17).
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-17).
The sensor and monitor do not support PoE

(Power over Ethernet). Supply power using
the power cable.
2-16
Cables
Connecting the monitor cable/

Ethernet cable
1 Align the pin connection parts of the
monitor cable/Ethernet cable connector

with three pins of the cable connector,
and connect the cable to the sensor.
Align the pins and

the pin connection
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector and cause
bad connections or cable disconnections.
Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Check the spaces between the monitor cable/
Ethernet cable and the cable connector.
For sensors
zz
* Same procedures for monitors.
Spaces between
connectors
2 Tighten the connector by turning the
For monitors
zz
screw-on connector in the clockwise

direction. When connecting the connector,
insert it without inclination while pushing
in and tighten it well.
(2)
When the screw stops rotating by the
locking mechanism, further tighten it
while pushing.
(1)
Tighten the screw-on connector
Spaces between
connectors
* Same procedures for monitors.
2-17
2
This section describes the details on connecting the

monitor cable/Ethernet cable using the example of
connecting the monitor cable to the sensor.
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot
tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool
such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces
between connectors are shown below.
yyMonitor cable/Ethernet cable
(OP-87450/OP-87451/OP-87452/OP-87453/
OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)
Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 Nm
Retightening degree : 5 to 10
Spaces between connectors (reference value)
For sensors : 0 mm
For monitors : 2.2 mm
Cables
MEMO
2
2-18
3
Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2

Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5
Setting to the Factory Default.........................3-12
Basic Operation for the Monitor......................3-14
3-1
3
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the contents of the monitor

display and operation of the IV Series, basic
operation flow, and operation when turning on the
power for the first time.
It also explains procedures to restore the sensor
and monitor to the default factory settings and basic
operation of monitor.
Overview of Screen and Operation

This section explains monitor displays and operation.
For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, see to the applicable references.
Run screen
3
Basic Operation
Images and judges based on

the judgment condition.
Starting an Operation
(Page 5-2)
Full-screen display/Zooming
Use the [Zoom] button to
enlarge the view of the monitor
Switching the display
to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)
Enlarging the image
display (Page 5-6)
Switching ON/OFF of
the menu display
Tool display
Select the display patterns
of tools from OFF / Window /
Process 1 / Process 2
Selecting a display method
for tools (Page 5-7)
Statistics display
Monitor Settings
Sets each function of the monitor.
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information
(Page 6-45)
Displays statistical information

of status on the monitor.
Displaying the statistical
information (Page 5-10)
Histogram display
Displays histogram of status
on the monitor.
Displaying the
histogram (Page 5-12)
3-2
Program list
Sets condition to judge a target.

Displaying the Sensor Setup
Menu Screen (Page 6-7)
Settings Navigator
Sets the program to be used
for judgment.

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator
(Page 4-1)
B
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment (Page 5-14)
Sensor Advanced
Performs the sensor advanced settings.
Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor (Page 6-25)
Tool Auto Tuning

Automatically adjusts threshold of
tool and extraction conditions of
Color Area/Area tool in accordance
with OK/NG image.
Adjusting the Judgment
Condition) (Page 5-15)
Sensor Image History
Operates the sensor image history.

Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)
(Page 6-14)
USB Memory
Sets the operation when using USB memory.

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory (Page 6-18)
3-3
3
Basic Operation
Checks or initializes
the program.
Things can be performed
with the program functions
(Page 6-8)
Sensor Setup Menu
Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow

Mounting, connecting, and wiring the sensor and monitor
Mount the sensor and monitor, and then connect and wire the cable.
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection (Page 2-1)
3
Basic Operation
Turning on the power

Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor, and then perform the initial startup setting.
Operation when the Power is Turned on (Page 3-5)
Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).
STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)
STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16
detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. If the setting is
inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation flow when the power is
turned on
Turn on the power
Initial start-up of the

monitor
yyDirect Connection
yyNetwork Connection
(2)
(4)
(5)
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the

(3)
activation condition in Settings Navigator. After the
setting is completed, operation begins.

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
Initial start-up of
the sensor
(3)
Sensor settings menu
(2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for

the first time, set the polarity.
Operation for initial startup of the sensor

(Page 3-11)
Run
Connecting...
(4) After the second time of starting the monitor

and sensor, the operation begins when the
power is turned on.

(5) When the connection is failed, the process
remains in the connecting screen.
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be

Connected with the Sensor (Page A-28)
The sensor can be independently operated.
3-5
3
Basic Operation
(1)
(1) When the power of the monitor is turned on for

the first time, set the display language, date and
time, and the connection method with the sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor, there
are Direct Connection and Network Connection.

(Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)

(Network Connection) (Page 3-7)
Operation for initial startup of

the monitor (Direct Connection)
1 Turn on the power of the monitor.
The screen to select the language opens.
Basic Operation
2 Select the language to be displayed on
5 Turn on the power of the sensor.

Turn on the power of the sensor before the monitor
is restarted by tapping the [OK] button in step 6.
6 Tap the [OK] button.
the monitor and tap the [OK] button.
The monitor restarts and connects to the

sensor.
[English] is selected in the default setting.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or []

button and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.
4 Select the [Direct Connection] button and
yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor

for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For
the details of procedures, refer to
Operation
for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen opens.
yyWhen the connection is unavailable with the frozen
connection screen, refer to
Remedy when
direct connection is unavailable (Page A-28).
yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
automatically set.
yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor
when the PROFINET function is being used,
the PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.
tap the [OK] button.
To use the FTP client function or field network,

select the [Network Connection] button.
The Complete Configuration screen opens.
3-6

the monitor (Network Connection)
4 Select the [Network Connection] button

and tap the [OK] button.
When connecting to a network, let engineers who

are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
3
Basic Operation
Setting the network address of the

monitor
1 Turn on the power of the monitor.
The screen to select the language opens.
2 Select the language to be displayed on
The Complete Configuration screen opens.
the monitor and tap the [OK] button.
The Network Settings screen opens.

[English] is selected in the default setting.
6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address,

subnet mask, and default gateway.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
The screen to set each item opens.

yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or []
button and enter the numbers.
the selected item.
At the initial startup or initialization of

the monitor, the monitor starts up with
192.168.10.1 as the IP address.
If there is a device with the same IP address
on the network, change the IP address before
connecting the monitor to the network.
3-7
7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway individually, and then tap

the [OK] button.
IP address
3
Basic Operation
The system returns to the network setup screen.
Searching for a sensor to be connected

Automatically searches for a sensor on the network
and connects with it.
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
reaches (Page A-40).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
the local network to which the monitor is
connected.

2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
The monitor restarts.
After restarted, the Sensor Connect screen
opens.
Searching for sensor begins.
There are two ways to set the sensor to be

connected. For details of procedures, refer to
each reference.
When the sensor on the network is

zz
searched

(Page 3-8)
When the sensor is specified by the IP

zz
address
When the searching is finished, the searched

result will be displayed.
If no sensor is found, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by searching
for the sensor (Page A-30).
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP

address (Page 3-10)
3-8
When a sensor with no IP address is found

zz
The confirmation dialog appears.
Empty
Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network

settings of the monitor.
When copying is completed, the information
screen opens.
IP address
3 When multiple sensors are found, select
the sensor to be connected with the [<] or

[>] button.
4 Connect to the sensor.
Tap the [OK] button.

The sensor network setup screen opens.
When connecting to the sensor with no IP

zz
address
Tap the [Connect] button.
Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet

mask, and default gateway, and set these items
individually.
When the monitor's IP address is copied,

the sensor's and monitor's IP address will be
duplicated. Make sure to change the IP address.
IP address
3-9
Basic Operation
When a sensor with an IP address is found

zz
The system returns to the network setup screen

for the sensor to be connected.
Specifying sensor to be connected by

IP address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
connected is defined beforehand.
3
Basic Operation

2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.
yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor
for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For
the details of procedures, refer to
Operation
for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen
opens.
3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be
connected and tap the [Connect] button.
When connecting to the sensor with set IP

zz
address
The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu

screen opens.
The monitor connects to the selected sensor

and the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.
3-10
If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer

to
When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor (Page A-31).

the sensor
When the monitor is connected to the sensor in
the default setting, the screen to select the polarity
(NPN or PNP) opens.
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in
Settings Navigator.
For details of the Polarity, refer to
Specification
of I/O circuit and current of the sensor (Page 2-14).
3
Basic Operation
1 Select the Polarity of the sensor and tap

the [OK] button.
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
2 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up

the program.
For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to

Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1).
3-11
Setting to the Factory Default

3 Tap the [System] button and then the
Initializing the sensor

Initializes information set in the sensor and uses
factory default setting.
3
Basic Operation
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP)
(Page 6-28)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP))
(Page 6-31)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually,
refer to Initializing a program (Page 6-13).
[Initialize Sensor] button.
4 Tap the [Go] button.
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.
The Sensor Advanced screen opens.
3-12
Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,

the initialization completion screen opens.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

screen.
Initializing the monitor

Initializes information set in the monitor and uses
factory default setting.
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Monitor Settings] button.
Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,

the initialization completion screen opens.
The Monitor Settings screen opens.

[Initialize Monitor] button.
3 Tap the [Go] button.

After restarting, set the display language, date
and time, and the connection method with the
sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor,
there are Direct Connection and Network
Connection.
(Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)
3-13
Basic Operation
The following settings will not be initialized.

yyLanguage (Page 6-51)
yyTime (Page 6-51)
Basic Operation for the Monitor

Editing the value with the slider
The value of a trigger interval and the threshold of

each tool can be edited.
This section explains how to edit the value with
the slider using an example of a trigger interval in
[Internal].
Setting by the [+] / [-] button

zz
By tapping the [+] / [-] button, the value of a
trigger interval increases or decreases (slider
slides in accordance with the value changed).
Basic Operation
1 In the Image Optimization settings of
The value
is updated
according to the
slider position
the Settings Navigator, tap the [Internal]

button in [Trigger Options].
The slider appears on the monitor.
Tap the [+] / [-] button to slide the
slider
For the slider which sets both upper and lower

limit, select the slider to be set and tap the [+] /
[-] button to set it.
Setting by inputting a value

zz
Set the trigger interval.
Setting by the slider

zz
Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or
left to set the trigger interval. According to the
slider position, the value of a trigger interval is
updated.
By tapping the button of the trigger interval,

the screen to input a value opens.
Input the value of a trigger interval and tap the
[OK] button.
Tap the button
The value
is updated
according to the
slider position
Slide the slider to the right or left
Input the value

of a trigger
interval
yyBy tapping the

reset to 0.
yyBy tapping the
can be deleted.
3-14
button, the value can be

button, the last number
Changing the size of the tool window

zz
Editing the tool window

The tool window displayed when the tool is set in
the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or
direction.
This section explains how to edit the tool window
using an example of [Outline] tool.
By touching either side of the tool window,

will be displayed. The height or width of
or
the tool window can be changed by touching
and dragging it.
Navigator, tap the [Add Tool] button and

tap the [Outline] button.
The tool window of the Outline tool will be
displayed at the center of the monitor.
By touching one of the corners of the tool

will be displayed. The size of the
window,
tool window can be changed by touching and
dragging it.
Tool window
2 Set the tool window of the Outline tool.
Selecting the shape of the tool window

zz
On the screen to set the detection tool, the
screen to select the shape of the tool window
opens by tapping the [Window Shape ] button.
[ Rect] or [ Circle] can be selected.
Rect
When the [ Circle] is selected in the Window

shape settings, the size of the circle can be
changed by touching and dragging the outline
of the circle.
Circle
Changing the direction of the tool window

zz
By touching and dragging the arrow mark on
the upper right of the tool window, the direction
of the tool window can be changed.
Moving the tool window

zz
By tapping inside the tool window,
will be
displayed. Move the tool window by touching

and dragging it.
The operations when an image is enlarged by
the [Zoom] button are as follow.
yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool
window to move the tool window.
yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool
window to change the image display position.
3-15
Basic Operation
1 In the tool setting of the Settings
3 Edit the program name.
Inputting characters
The programs or tools to be displayed on the

monitor can be named arbitrary.
This section explains how to input characters using
an example of [Program Name].
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
Basic Operation
(6)
According to the items to be set, the number of

characters, character types, and characters which
can be input are different.
(7)
On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the

[Detail] button.
(8)
(9)
(1) Program name

Displays a program name being editing.
(2) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the left.
(3) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the right.
(4) [Delete] button
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
2 Select the program to change the name

and tap the [Edit] button.
Select the
program
(5) Number of characters which can be input

Displays a number of characters that can be
input as a program name.
(6) Character button
Inputs an arbitrary character.
According to selection of the [Upper/Lower]
button, characters that can be input are different.
(7) [Upper/Lower] button
Switches a character to be input to uppercase /
lowercase.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
(9) [OK] button
Saves a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
4 After the characters are entered, tap the

[OK] button.
3-16
Selecting the file in the USB memory
5 Select the file to be sent.

(1)
This section explains how to select the file in the USB

memory connected to the monitor using an example
of [Transfer Program Settings].
(2)
1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Basic Operation
[USB Memory] button.
(9)
(1) Folder display

Displays a tree of currently displayed folder.
2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.
(2) [Up One Folder]

By selecting the [Up One Folder] and tapping
the [OK] button, you can go to the upper
hierarchy of currently displayed folder.
(3) File / Folder display
Displays a file and folder stored in the currently
displayed folder.
By selecting the folder and tapping the [OK]
button, you can go into the selected folder.
(4) [First] button
Moves to top page in the folder.
The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed.
4 Select the folder that stores the data and

Select
The folder and file stored in the selected folder

will be displayed.
(5) [<<] button

Moves to previous page in the folder.
(6) [>>] button
Moves to next page in the folder.
(7) [Last] button
Moves to last page in the folder.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a setting and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(9) [OK] button
When the folder is selected, you can go into the
selected folder. When the file is selected, the
selection of a file will be determined.
6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button

and proceed to the next setting.
3-17
MEMO
3
Basic Operation
3-18
4
Settings Navigator
This chapter explains the functions and operations

of the [Settings Navigator].
4-1
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)
Settings Navigator..............................................4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3
1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6
2. Master Registration (Registering
an Image as a Reference for Judgment)........4-20
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-28
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-60
Display Method of
Extended Functions Menus.............................4-66
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor
are set in each step. While sequentially following the steps with navigation buttons, perform the setting
using the menu buttons in accordance with the Settings Navigator guide.
Navigation
button
Settings
Navigator guide
Menu button
Flow in the Settings Navigator

STEP 1. Image Optimization settings
Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger
option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2. Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)
STEP 3. Tool settings

Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the
threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment
tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
STEP 4. Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
(Page 4-60)
4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Starting the Settings Navigator
Turn on the power of the sensor and

monitor.
6 Perform the following operation.
When the program which has not been set

zz
in step 5 is selected
Tap the [Start] button.
When the sensor is in the following condition,

the Sensor Setup Menu will be displayed.
Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
yyIf all programs are not being set
yyIf the sensor is being setting up
The Settings Navigator guide screen opens.
Tap the [OK] button and start setting [1. Image
Optimization].
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target) (Page 4-6)
When the program which has been set in

zz
step 5 is selected
Tap the [Start] button. Or tap the shortcut button

for each step.
The menu bar appears.
3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Shortcut button
The Settings Navigator guide screen of the

selected step opens.
5 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
Tap the [OK] button and start the setting.

1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target) (Page 4-6)
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
Targets) (Page 4-28)
Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
The Navi guide can be turned OFF if the
display of the Navi guide screen is not needed.
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.

4-3
2 Tap the [Menu] button.
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable
references.
A

(Clearly Image a Target)
(Page 4-6)
A
2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a
Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)
A
A
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the
Judgment Method for Targets)
(Page 4-28)
(Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
4-4
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide

When the Navi Guide is ON
zz
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be

saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
Finishing without completing the step
1 Tap the [Save] button at the upper right of

the screen.
You can display the function guide by tapping

the
button on the upper right of the screen
when operating the corresponding functions.
When the Navi Guide is OFF

zz
The step guide / extended functions guide /
function guide are not displayed
Finishing the Settings Navigator

This section explains the procedure for finishing the
Settings Navigator.
Finishing by completing all steps
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.

2 Tap the [Complete] button at the lower
right of the [Output Assignment] screen.
When the required settings are completed

zz
The confirmation dialog to save appears.
When the required settings are not

zz
completed
The confirmation dialog to finish appears.

yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation
dialog to save appears.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns
to the Settings Navigator screen.
The required settings have not been completed
yet. Even if the [OK] button is tapped, the
proper operation cannot be performed.
2 Tap the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be

saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
When the program setting is changed,

the confirmation dialog to save appears.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation

dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
4-5
4
yyThe step guide appears only the first time

when moving to each step.
yyThe extended functions guide appears only
the first time when displaying the Extended
Functions menu.
yyTo display the step guide and extended
functions guide again, finish and then start the
Settings Navigator again.
yyThe function guide always appears when
touching the following function buttons.
Focus Adjustment / Fine Tune Outline / Margin /
Color Extraction / Brightness Extraction /
Fixed Reference Area
3 Tap the [Yes] button.
3. Tool Settings
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Image Optimization
In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining
differences in high and low-quality-targets.
Trigger Options
zz
4
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing and can image continuously.
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
Checking the view and installed distance (Page 2-2)
Auto Brightness Adjustment

zz
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using
the CMOS image sensor.
In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface
condition (color, shininess, material).
Focus Adjustment
zz
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the
focusing position automatically.
4-6
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Main screen for the Image Optimization

This section explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(8)
(9)
(1) [Back] button

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.
(2) Image taken by the sensor
Displays an image taken by the sensor.
The image type to be displayed differs depending
on the settings screen.
(3) [Save] button
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(4) [Image Type] display
Displays the image type.
yy
.................Displays an image taken by

the currently imaging sensor.
(5) [Trig] button

Displayed when an external trigger is set.
The [Trig] and [Pause] button switches by each
time the button is tapped.
yy[Trig]..................Images by temporarily inputting
the internal trigger. Tap this
button when the position is to be
defined while a target is being
imaged in a state where the
external trigger cannot be input.
yy[Pause]..............Finishes the imaging with
internal trigger.
(10)
(11)
(7) Extended functions display button

Displays the extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization.
Extended functions for the Image Optimization
(Page 4-16)
(8) [Trigger Options] button
Performs the settings for the Trigger Options.
(9) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts brightness.
(10) [Focus Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts focus.
(11) [Next] button
Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as
a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
(6) [Zoom] button

Switches to full-screen display and the image of
the sensor can be zoomed.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)
4-7
(7)
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.
Settings for the Trigger Options
Items
Description
Setting range
Default
value
yyInternal
Starts imaging continuously within
the time interval specified in the
trigger interval setting.
Trigger
(Trigger type)
Trigger interval
Select the type of the timing to

start imaging.
Set when the [Internal] is

selected in the trigger type
setting.
yyExternal
Starts imaging with the external
Internal
trigger synchronized with the
target's motion from a photoelectric
sensor or PLC installed outside.
The time (trigger delay) between
inputting the trigger until imaging
starts can be set.
1 to 10000 ms
50 ms
Set an interval (cycle) to

automatically start imaging.
Set when the [External] is
selected in the trigger type
setting.
Trigger Delay
4-8
Used when the output timing

of the sensor for the trigger
0 to 1000 ms
occurrence and the imaging
timing of this device cannot be
synchronized.
This device starts imaging after
the time set in the trigger delay
of the trigger input passes.
0 ms
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Internal trigger
zz
Trigger interval Trigger interval
(1)
Internal trigger
Imaging/
internal processing
(2)
4
(3)
Status output
(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.
External trigger
zz
Trigger delay
(1)
External trigger
Imaging/
internal processing
(2)
(3)
Status output
(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing.

When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.
4-9
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
When the [Internal] is selected in step 4

zz
Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.
The screen to set the Trigger Options opens.
Extended functions
5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.
Setting the Trigger Options
Select the trigger type.
Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to

10000 ms.
If the internal trigger time is shorter than the
processing time (Page 5-40), a trigger error
occurs.
Internal trigger (Page 7-3)
Error Messages (Page A-22)
When the [External] is selected in step 4

zz
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to
1000 ms.
Select the [Internal] or [External] button.
The setting of the trigger interval and trigger

delay can be changed by using the slider or
inputting the value.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.
The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.
4-10
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings

In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target
can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure
time and an imaging mode according to the shape
and surface condition (color, shininess, material).
1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
Extended functions

Image Optimization.
yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted

manually.
Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the
sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the
Trigger Options settings.
yyDo not move a target during the auto brightness
adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
correctly.
3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment]

button.
After the adjustment is completed, the

Brightness adjustment completed. message
appears.
4-11
4
Focus Adjustment
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the
shape of a target.
Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type
of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/
auto focusing type).
Auto focusing type

zz
The focus position is adjusted automatically.

When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing
position is adjusted automatically again.
The focus can be adjusted manually with the
slider displayed on the monitor.
When the sensor detects multiple matching
positions for the focusing position, the optional
positions are marked on the slider. Select
the focus position from the detected optional
positions.
Extended functions
Focus adjustment for the auto focusing

type

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.
Manual focusing type

zz
Turn the focus adjustment screw using the
attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the
focusing position.
When the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is

set to [Common], the following dialog appears.
yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.

yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment.
The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
The guide screen for the Focus Adjustment opens.
The focusing position is adjusted automatically.
4-12
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
5 Adjust the focusing position as needed.
When the focusing position is to be

zz
adjusted automatically again
When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing

position is adjusted automatically again.
adjusted manually
Adjust the focus by the slider.
Extended functions

button.

Image Optimization.
When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus
will be reset to the previous position.
yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor
automatically images a target by inputting the
internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options
settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous
lighting (Page 4-18) is set, the sensor images
with the flash lighting.
yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that
can be focused over the entire area regardless
of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
For details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14).
When multiple focusing positions exist

zz
When there are multiple positions that can be
focused, the sensor adjusts to the closest position
to the sensor. The options of the position that can
be focused will be indicated with ( ) mark.
To change the focusing position to the optional
position, tap the [Next Pos] or the options ( ) of
the focusing position.
4-13
4

zz
Focus Adjustment
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Focus adjustment for the manual

focusing type
Extended functions
6 Turn the focus adjustment screw of
the sensor with the attached flathead

screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the
focus value reaches the peak mark.

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.

Bar gauge
Peak mark
The Settings Navigator guide opens.
The focus indicator will be displayed on the

monitor.
5 Image the target.
If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging

by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.
The peak mark is displayed on the position

where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the
focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge
on the peak mark position.
By tapping the [Clear peak] button, the peak
mark will be hidden, and the current focusing
value will be updated as a maximum value.
When the focus cannot be adjusted by
watching the focus indicator on the monitor,
you can check with the blinking cycle of the
STATUS and OUT of the indicator light.
yyQuickly blinks....... Focused.
yySlowly blinks........ Not focused. Adjust to the
most blinking position.
STATUS indicator light
OUT indicator light
4-14
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions

button.

Image Optimization.
The focus indicator indicates the positions that
can be focused over the entire area regardless of
the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
4
4-15
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Image Optimization

Adjust the Image Optimization in the extended functions menu.
Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization

Items
4
Imaging
Area
Description
Default
value
Setting range
Sets the imaging area (image

size of the sensor). When the
imaging area is reduced, the
shutter speed and judging
process become faster.
Bright
Adjusts the brightness of an
image manually.
yyEntire
Sets the field of view of the imaging area for
the sensor to the entire area.
yyPartial
Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area in
the sensor's field of view as an imaging area.
Standard range type (color)
Entire
1 to 100
Standard range type (monochrome) 1 to 120

Short range type
1 to 120
Long rang type
1 to 100
20
Imaging Mode
Selects imaging mode for
sensor.
yyNormal
This mode is the basic imaging mode. The
target can be imaged with less noise.
yyHDR
Select to image a target such as a metal that
reflects light and has high contrast.
yyHighGain
Select to shorten the exposure time and when
the imaging environment is in a dark place.
Lowers imaging quality due to high gain.
Normal
Lighting
Selects lighting mode for built-in

light.
yyOFF
Turns OFF the built-in light.
yyFlash
The built-in light lights within the exposure
when imaging.
yyContinuous
The built-in light lights continuously regardless of
specified exposure time when imaging a target.
Flash
Color
Filters
Applies color filters if the outline

of a certain color cannot be
displayed when the image is
displayed in monochrome by a
color type sensor.
(Color type only)
OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
OFF
Digital
Zoom
Switches digital zoom ON/OFF.

Images by magnifying the center
field two times. The field of view
ON/OFF
of horizontal and vertical sides
will be a half size.
(Monochrome type only)
Advanced
Brightness
Adjustment
4-16
OFF
Trigger Options
Imaging Area
1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)
3. Tool Settings
Tap the [Imaging Area] button.
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).
4 After the setting is completed,


Image Optimization.
The screen to set the imaging area opens.
3 Select type of imaging area.

Outside of specified area
If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
Imaging area
yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area

containing tool windows of all tools which have
been set will be displayed as [Actv Range].
The imaging area cannot be set smaller than
the active range. To narrow down the imaging
area, change the placement of the tool
windows before adjusting the imaging area.
yySet an area including the center of the field of
the view when trapezoidal correction (Page
6-38) is to be performed. A region that cannot
be exposed is created in the exposure area.
4-17
When an imaging area is specified, the area

outside the specified area will be displayed in
black.
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Advanced Brightness Adjustment
Lighting
Image Optimization.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment]
Image Optimization.

(Page 4-66)
button.
2 Tap the [Lighting] button.
The screen to adjust brightness opens.
3 Select the lighting mode from
3 Set brightness and an imaging mode.
According to the brightness and imaging mode,

the exposure time will be calculated automatically.
[OFF]/[Flash]/[Continuous].
Exposure time

yyFor the details of settings with the slider or

by inputting a value, refer to
Editing the
value with the slider (Page 3-14).
yyBy tapping the [Auto] button, a light intensity,
an exposure time and an imaging mode can
be adjusted automatically.


Image Optimization.

Image Optimization.
yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re-register
the master image and re-set the tool.
Otherwise a correct judgment may not be
possible.
yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected,
the light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms
right before imaging.
When the master image is registered and

settings other than Trigger Options and
imaging area are changed, the confirmation
message that recommends you to re-register
the master image appears. Tap the [OK]
button and re-register the master image.
4-18
Trigger Options
3. Tool Settings
Color Filters (color type only)

This is disabled for the Color Area tool.

Image Optimization.

(Page 4-66)
Focus Adjustment
Extended functions
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)

Image Optimization.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.
4
2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.
3 Set the digital zoom to [ON]/[OFF].

The image changes to monochrome. In the
example in the figure above, the red and blue
outlines become unclear.
3 Select the color to apply the color filter.
Select the filter for the color or the complementary

color to be detected. Select red here.


Image Optimization.
The color filter corresponding to the selected

color will be applied. The red color becomes
brighter and the outline with the blue color
becomes clear.
Clarified outline
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Image Optimization.
4-19
3. Tool Settings
(Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the master image registration.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) [Back] button

Returns to the settings screen for the Image
Optimization.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)
(Page 4-6)

Displays extended functions menu for the
master image registration.
For details, refer to
the Master Registration (Page 4-22).
(2) Master image

Displays a master image. If no master image is
registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed.
(7) [Register Live Image as Master] button

Registers an image taken by the sensor as a
master image.
Registering the master
image (Page 4-21).
(3) [Save] button

Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
Displays an image type.
yy
yy
yy
yy
yy
.................Displays a master image (still

image).
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
.................Displays an image in the
Sensor Image History.
.................Displays an image in USB
memory.
.................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
(8) [Next] button

Proceeds to "3. Tool settings".
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
(5) [Zoom] button

Switches the display in full-screen mode and
makes it possible to enlarge an image on the
monitor.
Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-5).
4-20
3. Tool Settings
Register Live Image as Master
Registering the master image
Extended functions
2 Display the main screen for the Master

Registration.

(Page 4-4)
of judgment on the imaging position.
4 Tap the [Register Live Image as Master]

button.
The master image will be registered and returns

to the main screen for the Master Registration.
The disabling outline settings (Page 4-35, Page 4-55)

will be initialized. Set the disabling outline settings
again as needed.
Switches to the [LIVE] screen.
5 Image the target.

button.
6 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.
The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration

appears.
4-21
3 Place the high-quality-target as reference
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Master

Registration
Items of extended functions for the
Master Registration
Select Img From Image History

zz
Registers an image of the image history in the

memory of the sensor as a master image.
To perform the master image registration from
the image history in the sensor, the image to
be registered as a master image in the image
history must be saved.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)
Master image registration from the

image history in the sensor
Registers an image of the image history in the
memory of the sensor as a master image.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)
1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Master Registration.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Select Img From Image History]

button.
Select Img From USB Memory

zz
Registers the image in USB memory as a master
image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master
image to the USB memory in advance.
yyThe files which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iva)
and image capture files (*.ivp).
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory (Page 6-18)
The [Sensor Image History] screen opens.
3 Select the image to be registered
as
a master image and tap the [Register]
button.
Brightness Correction
zz
Select the image
By setting a reference of brightness to the master

image, effects of changing the brightness can be
reduced.
yyThe brightness correction can be set when
the master image is registered.
yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type, the
brightness correction will be disabled.
For details of how to operate the screen,

refer to
Loading and confirming the saved
images (Page 6-15).
The selected screen opens on the monitor.
4-22
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions

4

If the imaging area of the loaded image is
different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.
The new master image will be registered and

returns to the main screen for the Master
Registration.
4-23
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Registering from the image in the USB

memory
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture
file (*.ivp) stored in USB memory, and register as a
master image.
5 Select the image to be registered as
a master image and tap the [Register]

button.
Select the
image
When using a batch backup file (*.iva)
Backing up in a batch (Page 6-19)
1 Connect the USB memory which stores
the batch backup files (*.iva) to the USB

port.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-18)

the master image registration.

(Page 4-66)
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]
For details of how to operate the screen,

refer to
images (Page 6-15).
The selected image will be magnified.

button.

The data in USB memory will be displayed.
4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.


Select the file
For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to
Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-17).
The image of selected file will be displayed.
4-24

returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
When using an image capture file (*.ivp) 5 Check the image displayed on the monitor
Saving the image history individually (Page 6-20)
1 Connect the USB memory which stores
the image capture files (*.ivp) to the USB

port.

(Page 4-66)
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]

button.

The data in USB memory will be displayed.
4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.
Select the file

returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.

memory, refer to
The selected image will be magnified.
4-25
the master image registration.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
5 Set the tool window to be a reference of
Brightness correction
For the Color Area tool of the color type, this will
be disabled.
brightness correction and tap the [OK]

button.

the Master Registration.
Tool window to
be a reference
of brightness
collection

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Brightness Correction] button.
The information screen opens (color type only).
The settings screen for the Brightness Correction

opens.
In the case of color operation type, the image
will be displayed in monochrome.
For the region to be a reference of brightness

correction, specify the following.
yyA region with average medium brightness.
A region with strong shininess and reflection
and a region which is too dark may not be
corrected properly.
yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change such as device parts
other than the targets .
6 Tap the [Test] button.
4 Tap the [Select Region] button.
The screen to set a reference of the brightness

correction opens.
4-26
If the brightness in the specified region is

changed using the masking shield, check that
the brightness of the entire image is corrected.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
7 Tap the [Before Corr]/[After Corr] button

and check the operation status before
brightness correction and status after
brightness correction.
4
8 Tap the [Back] button.
The system returns to the settings screen for

the Brightness Correction.

button.

Image Optimization.
yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used,

tap the [Delete] button on the screen in step 4.
yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness of
the entire image to make the average brightness
in the tool window to be a reference of brightness
correction the same as the brightness of the
master image.
4-27
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)
4
In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target

is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the
master image.
The aspects of a target registered as a master
image are set as a high-quality-target. During an
operation, the sensor judges whether it is a highquality-target or low-quality-target by judging the
differences in the registered high-quality-target and
a target to be examined.
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to
1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools
can judge a target at the same time.
Selecting a tool according to its

intended purpose
Select a tool according to with the purpose of an
examination.
Types of tools
Outline tool
zz
A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for
the target to be examined based on the outline
information of a registered high-quality-target.
Judges whether a target is a high or low-qualityproduct by setting the threshold to the matching
rate.
Outline tool (Page 4-32)
Tool settings
Master image
Outline extraction processing
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing
<Judge is OK>
Detection tool to be used

Purposes
Outline tool
Color Area/
Area tool
To detect the surface/

rear face of parts
To detect the
orientation of parts
To detect mixture of
parts with different
shapes
To detect assembly
deficiencies of parts
To detect processing
defects of parts
To detect differences
in sizes (areas)
To detect mixture of
different colors
Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes

as an outline of a high-quality-target.
Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
Example when the result was NG
No same shapes exist
(Detection of existence)
Different shape
(Shape detection)
Different direction
(Detection of direction)
The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases in accordance with
the number of non-matched parts.
4-28
Color Area/Area tool

zz
3. Tool Settings
Position Adjustment tool

zz
A tool to correct the differences in positioning
(position gap) of a target to be examined. The
position adjustment is used with other detection
tools.
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)
Tool settings
Master image
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area

(number of pixels) of a target to be examined as
the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels)
of a registered high-quality-target. This judges
whether a target is a high or low-quality-product
by setting the threshold to the matching rate.
If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color
Area tool. The system judges by the area with an
arbitrary specified color.
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will
be the Area tool. The system judges by the area
with an arbitrary specified brightness.
Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-40)
Tool settings
Color extraction process
(Color type)
Master image
Brightness extraction process

(Monochrome type)
Tool window
Position adjustment window
Processing during an operation

Position adjustment process
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing
<Judge is OK>
Tool window
Search area of the tool window
Compares the area of a target as defining an

area of high-quality-target to 100 %.
Example when the judgment was NG

Area is narrow
Area is wide
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default).

100 indicates that an area is completely
matched. The matching rate decreases as
the area of a target narrows.
yyThe setting range of the display range and
threshold for matching rate can be changed to
0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged
by setting the threshold to the upper limit.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-46)
4-29
3. Tool Settings
Main screen for the Tool Settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(1) [Back] button

Returns to the Master Registration screen.
(7) [View] button

Displays a menu to select the display pattern of
tools.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
(2) [Tool Name] button

Displays a name of the selected tool on the
monitor. From the pull-down menu, the selected
tool can be switched.

Tool Settings.
Extended functions for the Tool settings
(Page 4-58)
(3) Master image

Displays the master image and tool window. If
a search region is set, the tool window which
indicate the search region (light blue) will be
displayed.
By tapping the tool window, the selected tool
can be switched.
(4) [Save] button
Saves the settings.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
Displays an image type.
yy
yy
yy
.................Displays a master image (still

image).
.................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
(9) [Add Tool] button

Adds tools.
Adding a tool (Page 4-31)
(10) [Edit Tool] button
Edits settings for the selected tool.
Editing a tool (Page 4-31)
(11) [Delete Tool] button
Deletes the selected tool.
Deleting a tool (Page 4-31)
(12) [Next] button
Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
(6) [Zoom] button

Switches to the full-screen display and makes it
possible to enlarge an image on the monitor.
Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-5).
4-30
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool
3. Tool Settings
Editing a tool
Edits the settings of a tool which has already been set.
Adding a tool
1 Select a tool to edit the settings.
Newly sets a tool.
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.
2 Tap the tool to be added.
yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button

is displayed.
yyIf one or more tools are set in one program,
the [Edit Tool] and [Delete Tool] button are
displayed.
2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button.

3 Edit setting items for each tool.

Deleting a tool
Deletes an unnecessary tool.
By tapping the
tools appears.
button, the help screen for
1 Select a tool to be deleted.
3 Set setting items for each tool.

2 Tap the [Delete Tool] button.

The selected tool will be deleted and returns to

the main screen for the Tool settings.
4-31
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool
Items
Rect
Fine Tune Outline
Selects the window shape to

specify an area of the target
to be detected.
Entire
yyEntire
Specifies an area to search the
Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position
outline of a target. By specifying
adjustment)
search region.
the smaller area as a search
yyPartial
Partial
region, the processing time will
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position
be shortened.
size in the imaging area.
adjustment)
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Judges by disabling an
You can undo back to 5 operations before.
unnecessary outline which
yyClear
interrupts the stabilized
Initializes all the disabling processes.
detection. Specify by tracing
yyEraser Width
the extracted outline with stylus.
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
heavy) of the pen when specifying an
unnecessary outline.
Sensitivity
yy Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.
yy Circle
Specifies with the circular window.
An arbitrary size and position can be
specified with stylus.
Remove Outline
Default value
Search Region
Edit Window
Setting range
Window Shape
Description
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
yyNorm
Extracts the standard outline.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of
an outline that is not necessary to detect.
Limit
Adjustment
The extraction sensitivity of

an outline can be selected
according to the target.
Adjusts a threshold (matching

rate*) used in the OK/NG
judgment. During threshold
adjustment, the system turns
to the Test mode so that the
thresholds can be adjusted to
the applicable value during an
operation.
0 to 100
* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched.

Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts.
4-32
Not specified
Norm
70
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
6 Select a tool window shape.
Setting the Outline tool
2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

(Page 4-4)
Circle
[Outline] button.

The main screen for the Outline tool settings opens.
4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.
The system returns to the screen to set the

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of the
tool window in accordance with the target.

Set the tool
window
The screen to set the [Window Shape] and

[Search Region] opens.
yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Outline tool will be displayed.
Extended functions for the Outline tool
(Page 4-37)
5 Tap the [Window Shape] button.

9 Set a search region as needed.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)

button.

Outline tool settings.
11 Adjust the outline as needed.

The screen to select the window shape opens.
Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-35)

Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-36)
4-33
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the
Rect
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Extended functions
14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

by checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.
13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.

button.
Matching rate
Threshold
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the
display color of the tool changes.
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to
Position Adjustment Tool (Page A-5).

button.


Tool settings.
4-34
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting a search region
Settings for disabling outlines
When a range of the search region is to be specified,

perform the following procedures.
Perform the following procedures to delete an

unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.
1 Tap the [Search Region] button.
1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
2 Tap the [Partial] button.

2 Specify an outline which detection is not

needed by tracing it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
The editing screen for a search region opens.
3 Set a tool window indicates the search region.
Search region
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

yyThe search region cannot be rotated.
The outline that the

outline extraction has
disabled (yellow)
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.

button.

button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Window

Shape] and [Search Region].
4-35
The selection screen for a search region opens.
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following

procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.
4
The outline
cannot be
extracted

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.
Select the [High] in this section.

button.
Extracted
outline

4-36
Outline tool > Extended functions
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Outline tool

Items
Margin
Search
Algorithm
Setting range
Sets a range of the rotating direction to search

an outline of the target.
The system judges NG if an angle of the
target exceeds its rotation range even if the
target is the same shape.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide,
0 to 180 (Unit: 1)
the acceptable range of variations of angles
when a target is placed can be increased.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too
narrow, the processing time can be shorten.
yyThis can be used for judging the direction of
the target by limiting the rotation range.
Default
value
20
Select whether or not to allow the margin for

the limited angle set in Rotation Range.
yyON
The tool window will search
with the range few degrees
wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.
The detection mode of the Outline tool can be

selected according to the target.
yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in outlines can be
detected with a high degree of
accuracy.
High
yyHigh Speed
Outlines can be judged faster than Accuracy
in high accuracy mode.
There may be an influence from
the background or unnecessary
outlines other than the target.
An arbitrary name such as the name of a

target can be set in tools. Tool names can be
Tool Name
checked on the run screen.
Up to 8 characters in one byte

English characters can be set.
ON
(None)
4-37
4
Rotation
Range
Description
3. Tool Settings
Rotation Range
1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Outline tool.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.
Extended functions

button.

Search Algorithm

the Outline tool.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

3 Set a rotation range of the Outline tool.
3 Select the type of search algorithm (High

Speed/High Accuracy).
For details of setting using the slider or by

inputting value, refer to
Editing the value
with the slider (Page 3-14).
4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

button.

yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable

because of the influence of the rotation angle
of the target. The tool window will search with
the range few degrees wider than the setting
value of rotation range. (The tool window
will search few degrees even if the rotation
range is set to 0)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.
4-38
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not

stable because of a small difference in the
matching rate of a high and low-quality-target.
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
not stable because of the influence of an
unnecessary outline other than the target such
as the background.
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing
time.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Tool Name

the Outline tool.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.
4
The screen to set the tool name opens.
3 Input an arbitrary name.
For details of how to enter characters, refer to

Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

button.

The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,

characters might be garbled.
4-39
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool
Items
Description
Setting range
Default
value
yy Rect
yy Circle
Rect
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of
an image displayed in the monitor
becomes the extraction target.
Edit Window
Add Mask
Mask
Window Shape
Select the window shape to

specify an area of the target
to be extracted.
Mask
Shape
Cut mask
Clip
Shape
Adds a rectangular/circular
mask region in the tool
window frame.
Inside the mask region
is excluded from an area
extraction target.
Adds a rectangular/circular
cutting region in the mask
region.
Inside the mask cutting
region, the mask is disabled
and it becomes the target of
the area extraction.
yy Rect
Specifies a rectangular mask region
or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
size, position, and angle can be
yy Circle
Specifies a circular mask region or
a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
size and position can be specified
with stylus.
Rect
yySetting counts
Adding or cutting the mask can be
set up to 20 times.
yyExtract Area [+]
Expands a range of the color to be
extracted and expands an extraction
area.
Color Extraction
(For color type)
Tap a color to be extracted

on the master image and set
an extraction range.
yyExtract Area [-]

Contracts a range of the color to be
extracted and narrows an extraction
(No extraction)
area.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be
cancelled.
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
color.
to Live Image
4-40
The color range to be

extracted can be set on the
Live image of the target.
Outline tool
Items
Description
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting range
Default
value
yyExtraction Area
Sets the upper and the lower limit
of brightness in a range within 0 to
255 with the tapped brightness as a
Tap brightness to be extracted reference.
Brightness Extraction
(No extraction)
on the master image and set yyUndo
(For monochrome type)
the extraction range.
The previous operation can be
cancelled.
to Live Image
Limit Adjustment
A brightness range to be
extracted can be set on the
Live image of the target.
Adjusts a threshold
(matching rate*) used in the
OK/NG judgment. During the
thresholds adjustment, the
0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting
system switches to the Test is OFF)
mode so that a threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
Scale
yy0-200
When the upper limit of
Sets the upper and the lower limit of
the threshold is ON, select
a threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
the threshold scale in
y
0-999
y
accordance with the range
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
of the matching rate required
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
for the judgment.
The slider movement unit is 5.
Upper Limit
Upper
Limit
Sets the upper limit of the

threshold.
Set when the OK/NG
judgment is desired if the
target area is larger than the
OK area.
yyEnable
Activates the upper limit setting.
yyDisable
Deactivates the upper limit setting.
50
Disable
0-200
* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area
and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.
4-41
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
brightness.
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Setting the Color Area/Area tool
Extended functions

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the
Rect
Circle
[ColorArea] button (color type) or [Area]

button (monochrome type).

The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool
settings opens.
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will

be hidden.

[Window Shape] and [Mask].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.
Set the tool

window

[Mask] opens.
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Color Area/Area tool will be displayed.
Extended functions of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 4-48)

9 Perform the mask setting as needed.
Inside the mask region is excluded from the

area extraction target.
Mask settings (Page 4-45)

Color Area/Area tool settings.
4-42
Outline tool
11 Set the area to be the target to extract.

For color type
zz
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
For monochrome type

zz
Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.
Tap the [Color Extraction] button.
The tapped color will be extracted.

yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can
be added.
yyTap the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range,
and the range of color to be extracted can be
expanded/reduced.
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the

range of the color to be extracted can be set
with the Live Image of the target.
yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the
color to be the reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Color Area tool settings.
The tapped brightness will be extracted.

yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been
extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction
range can be added.
yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness
to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14).
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
range of the brightness to be extracted can
be set with the Live image of the target.
yyWhen the brightness extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color
to be the reference for judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Area tool settings.
4-43

The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.
Tap the color to be the reference of judgment
for the color area.

The screen to select brightness to be extracted
opens.
Tap the brightness to be the reference of
judgment for the color area.
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
15 Set the upper limit as needed.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-46)

button.

The sensor turns to Test mode.
13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.

button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.
<Setting example>
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.
Matching rate
Threshold
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
4-44
Outline tool
Mask settings
Perform the following procedures if a mask region

is to be specified in the tool window.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
mask shape in accordance with the target.

Set mask shape
1 Tap the [Mask] button
2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask

region.
7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
The screen to set a mask region and a mask

shape opens.
3 Tap the [Mask Shape] button.

The screen to set a mask cutting region and
cutting shape opens.
8 Tap the [Clip Shape] button.

4 Select the mask shape and tap the [OK]
button.
4-45
The screen to set a mask region opens.

Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK]

button.
Extended functions
Setting the upper limit
To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of

the target is wider than an area of a high-qualitytarget, perform the following procedures.
1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button.
4
cutting shape in accordance with the target.

Set clip shape
2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit

threshold and select the scale.

Select the scale in accordance with a range of

the matching rate required for judgment.

mask region.
button.
12
Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set

the mask region.
button.
The slider to set the upper limit and the lower

limit of the threshold will be displayed.

button.
Area not be
masked
Masked area

[Window Shape] and [Mask].
4-46
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions

4
Matching rate
Threshold (upper limit)

Threshold (lower limit)
yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within

threshold range, and NG when it is outside
the range.
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

button.

4-47
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions
Extended functions
Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool

Items
Description
Setting range
yyH (hue)
0 to 359
(both starting point
and ending point)
yyColor type
Advanced Color
Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB
Extraction
yyS (saturation)
(H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).
(For color type)
0 to 255
Advanced Brightness
yyB (Brightness)
Extraction
0 to 255
yyMonochrome type
Specifies brightness value to be
0 to 255
extracted.
to Live Image
A color/brightness range to be extracted

can be set on the Live image of the target.
Tool Name
An arbitrary name such as name of a

target can be set to tools. Tool names can
be checked on the run screen.
Up to 8 characters
in one byte English
characters can be set.
(None)
yyDisable
Matches the area
extracted from the
master image as the
criteria of a rate of
100%.
yyEnable: Large
Select a condition which the matching rate
Matches 1/10th of
the total sensor view
of the Color Area/Area is 100%.
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of
the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
Disable
4-48
Default
value
Outline tool
Advanced Brightness Extraction

the Color Area/Area tool.

(Page 4-66)
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Tool Name


(Page 4-66)
Tap the [Tool Name] button.

2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button. 2
4
For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced

Brightness Extraction] button.
The screen to set the tool name opens.
3 Specify a color or brightness of the
3 Input an arbitrary name.
extraction target.
For color type

zz

For monochrome type

zz

button.

The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
When the [to Live Image] button is tapped, the

color extraction condition can be checked with
the Live image.

button.


characters might be garbled.
4-49
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
5 Extract the color/brightness range to be judged.
Extract from the Live image

zz
Select [Enable] if the color/brightness to be judged

in the master image cannot be detected.
Tap the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction]

button.
By tapping the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/
brightness range to be judged from LIVE image.
The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference

area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool
Auto Tuning target.

Display Method of Extended Functions

Menus (Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button.
The color/brightness range to be extracted

can be specified by using [Advanced Color
Extraction]/[Advanced Brightness Extraction].
Extract from the master image, and then

zz
move the tool window

3 Perform the Fixed Reference Area.
Tap the [Edit Window] button and move the tool

window.
By tapping the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness
Extraction] button, extract the color/brightness
range to be judged.
Tap the [Edit Window] button again, and move
the tool window to the position where the color/
brightness is to be judged.
Extract
the color/
brightness
Move
6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-50
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions

If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from
the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal
sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly
even if the position was off-centered.
Tool settings
Master image
Run
Tool window
Search region of the tool window
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer.
yyIn the case of the Outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is
searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged.
yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined
and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example,
intended purposes are shown below.
- For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction.
- For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not.
yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status
result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can
be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position
determining accuracy for a target.
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set
will be changed.
- Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default
value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
- Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the
default value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the
position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools.
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment
yyFor details of matching rate, refer to
Tool (Page A-5).
4-51
Tool window
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool

Items
Setting range
Window Shape
yy Rect
Select a shape of the window
to specify the range of a target
to be position adjustment
yy Circle
reference.
Search Region
Specifies an area to search

yyEntire
a target to be a reference
Specifies the entire imaging area as a
of position adjustment. By
search region.
specifying the narrower area as yyPartial
a search region, the processing
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary
time will be shortened.
size in the imaging area.
Remove Outline
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
You can undo back to 5 operations before.
yyClear
Initializes all the disabling processes.
yyEraser Width
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
heavy) of the pen when specifying an
unnecessary outline.
Sensitivity
Fine Tune Outline
Edit Window
Description
Limit
Adjustment
Rect
Entire
Unnecessary outlines which

obstruct the steady position
adjustments can be disabled.
Specifies by tracing the
extracted outline with stylus.
Not specified
The extraction sensitivity of

an outline can be selected
according to the target.
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
yyNorm
Extracts the standard outline.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume
of an outline that is not necessary to
detect.
Norm
Adjusts a threshold (matching

rate*) which judges whether
the position adjustment is
succeeded or failed. During
threshold adjustment, the
0 to 100
system switches to the Test
mode so that the threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.

Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.
4-52
Default value
70
Outline tool
Setting the Position Adjustment tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions

(Page 4-4)
Circle
[Pos.Adj.] button.

The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool
settings opens.

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.
Set the tool

window

[Search Region] opens.
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display
button, the extended functions menu for the
position adjustment tool will be displayed.
Extended functions for the Position
Adjustment tool (Page 4-57)
Set the position and size of tool window as

large as possible by selecting the part that is
dissimilar in shape.
Stabilizing the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
9 Set a search region as needed.

button.

Position Adjustment tool settings.
4-53
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and then the
Rect
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
11 Adjust the outline as needed.

Extended functions
14 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not

the position adjustment is succeeded by
checking the matching rate.
4
Matching rate
13 Image the target.


button.
Threshold
yyIf there are many variations of target shapes

that a tool window has been set to, set the
threshold to a lower matching rate.
than the threshold.
yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment]
of the sensor setting menu screen.

button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.
4-54
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting a search region
Settings for disabling outlines
To limit a range (adjusting range of position

adjustment) to search a target to be a reference,
set it in the search region setting. When a range
of the search region is to be specified, perform the
following procedures.
Perform the following procedures to delete an

unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.
1 Tap the [Search Region] button.
The selection screen for a search region opens.
2 Tap the [Partial] button.
2 Specify the unnecessary outline in basic
shapes of position adjustment by tracing

it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to
yellow.
The editing screen for a search region opens.
3 Set the tool window indicates a search region.
Search region
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

yyThe search region cannot be rotated.
The outline that the

outline extraction
has disabled
(yellow)
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.

button.

button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Window

Shape] and [Search Region].
4-55

Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following

procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.
4
The outline
cannot be
extracted

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.
Select [High] in this section.

button.
Extracted
outline

4-56
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Position Adjustment tool > Extended functions
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Items
Rotation
Range
Default
value
Setting range
Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.

The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting
the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range.
0 to 180
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range
of variation in angles when a target is placed can be set wider. (Unit: 1)
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the
processing time can be shorten.
Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited

angle set in Rotation Range.
20
yyON
The tool window will
search with the range
few degrees wider
than the setting value
of rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will
search only within the
set rotation range.
ON
Rotation Range

the Position Adjustment tool.
4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

(Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.
3 Set the rotation range of the Position

Adjustment tool.
yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

is not stable because of the influence of the
rotation angle of the target.
The tool window will search with the range
few degrees wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
(The tool window will search few degrees
even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.

button.

For details of settings by the slider or inputting
value, refer to
Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-14).
4-57
4
Margin
Description
Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Tool settings

Items of extended functions for the Tool settings
Items
Copy Tool
Description
Setting range
Default
value
Copies a tool which has been set, and pastes it to the

same position.
This is for outline tool and color area/area tool.
Copy Tool
This section explains using example of the Outline tool.
1 Select the copy source tool.

Select the copy
source tool.

the Tool settings.
The copied tool window with the selected status

will be displayed in the copy source tool window.
Name of copied tool

(Page 4-66)
3 Tap the [Copy Tool] button.
Copied tool
The tool number which has not been set

will be automatically assigned to the copy
destination tool number.

If 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.
5 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and set the copied

tool.

4-58
MEMO
4
4-59
3. Tool Settings
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output
line (OUT1 to OUT4).
Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor
(Page 2-12)
Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line
(Page 7-1)
Main screen for the Output

Assignment
Setting range of the Output

Assignment
Setting
range
Description
OFF
Do not output.
Output function will be constantly OFF.
When the total status result of the

tools which have been set was OK,
the output function turns ON.
Total Status
The condition of the total status can
be selected from [All Tools OK] /
[Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
(1)
(2)
Tot.
StatusNG
(3)
RUN
When the sensor is running with no

system error occurred, the output
function turns ON.
BUSY
The output function turns ON when

the system is in a state that cannot
input additional trigger; such as
during imaging, judging processing,
switching programs, and registering
external master images.
Error
The output function turns ON

when an error has occurred; such
as system error, memory readout
error for startup, external master
registration error, trigger error (when
the trigger settings are enabled).
Pos. Adj.
When position adjustment processing

is finished normally, the output function
turns ON.
Tool 01 to 16
When the status result of specified

tool is OK, the output function turns
ON. Status results can be output for
each tool.
Logic 1 to 4
When the status result of specified logic

is OK, the output function turns ON.
(4)
(5)
(1) [Back] button

Returns to the Tool settings screen.
(2) Output assignment button
Assigns the output item to each output line.
(3) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output
Select whether to enable/disable the output
when the trigger error occurred.
Error Messages (Page A-22)
(4) [Complete] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator.
Output Assignment.
Menus (Page 4-66)
When the total status result was

NG, the output function turns ON.
Default value
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
Trigger Error
:Total Status (N.O.)

:BUSY (N.O.)
:Error (N.C.)
:OFF
:OFF
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.

yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
4-60
3. Tool Settings
Output Assignment
Extended functions
Setting the Output Assignment
2 Display the main screen for the Output

Assignment.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the item name of output line to perform
output assignment and select the output item.
4 Finish the Settings Navigator.
4-61
Output Assignment
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
Extended functions for the Output Assignment

Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Items
Description
Logic
Total Status
Conditions
4-62
Default
value
Assigns the logical operation

results of each detection tool to
the output function.
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can
be defined.
yyUnused
The selected items are not used in
a logical formula.
yyUsed
When the status results of the
selected items were OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyUsed (Inverse)
When the status results of the
selected items were NG, the total
Unused
Selects the logical operation

method of logics.
yyAND
Calculates the logical multiply
(AND) of all selected items.
yyOR
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of
all selected items.
AND
Selects a condition for the total

status result. The total status
result is displayed in accordance
with the selected condition.
yyAll Tools OK
When all of the status results of the
detection tools was OK, the total
yyAny Tools OK
When any of the status results of
All Tools OK
the detection tools was OK, the total
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result of the set
logic was OK, the total status
output function turns ON.
4
Logic Settings
Setting range
3. Tool Settings
Output Assignment
Logic Settings
Extended functions
5 Select items to be integrated into the logic.
the Output Assignment.

Menus (Page 4-66)
2 Tap the [Logic Settings] button.
The Logic Settings screen opens.
3 Tap the number which the logic judgement

condition is to be defined.
The status result of the logic is calculated from

OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used
(Inverse)] has been set.
Logic : AND
zz
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(Inverse)
Logic 1 to 4
Image of logic output when the Logic

is [AND]
When an undefined detection tool has been

defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.]
is displayed on the right side of the logic number.
4 Select the logical operation method of the logic.
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Logic
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic

output is the logical multiply (AND) of the
status results of each selected item.
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical sum (OR) of the status
results of each selected item.
4-63
Red checks are displayed at the items which

"Used" is selected.
Blue checks are displayed at the items which
"Used (Inverst)" is selected.
Output Assignment
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions
6 When the setting is completed, tap the
Logic : OR
zz
[OK] button.
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(Inverse)
Logic 1 to 4
The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.
7 Tap the [Close] button.

Image of logic output when the Logic

is [OR]
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Logic
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used

(Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/
Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
were OK, the status output function for items
in the logic turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used
(Inverse)] items were NG, the status output
function for items in the logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which
is greater than the logic number which has
been set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.
When the program number has been changed
and you went to [Run] from [Program] after
the power ON, the judgement is not done if no
trigger input. The judgement output of each
tool is OFF.
4-64
3. Tool Settings
Output Assignment
Total Status Conditions
Extended functions
Any Tools OK
zz
Display the extended functions menu for

the Output Assignment.
Menus (Page 4-66)
Tap the [Total Status Conditions] button.
When any of the detection tools was OK, the

total status output function turns ON.
Tool A
Tool B
OK
NG
OK
NG
Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Any Tools OK]
3 Select a total status condition.
For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the total
status conditions.
Logic 1 to 4
zz
When the status result of the defined logic was
OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Logic OK
1 to 4 NG
Total OK
Status NG
The total status result is displayed in

accordance with the selected condition.

status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]
All Tools OK
zz
When all of the detection tools were OK, the
total status output function turns ON.
Tool A
Tool B
OK
NG
OK
NG
yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the

status result of each tool is NG.
yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from
the imaging area when position adjustment
succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and
the status result is NG.
4 When the setting is completed, tap the
Total OK
Status NG
[OK] button.

status condition is [All Tools OK]

4-65
Total OK
Status NG
In each setting for Settings Navigator, the extended

functions menu will be displayed by tapping the < >
extended functions display button at the lower left on
the screen.
This section explains how to display the extended
functions menu using an example of the Image
Optimization screen.
For details of extended functions menu, refer to
details in each step.

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the <
> extended functions display

button at the lower left of the window.
The extended functions menu will be displayed.
Tap the arbitrary button and set the extended

functions menu.
The extended functions menu will be hidden
by tapping the < > button.
4-66
5
Operating/Adjusting
This chapter explains the procedures for starting

the operation, the names and functions of each part
and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the
judgment ability of the IV Series.
5-1
5
Operating/Adjusting
Starting an Operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen....................5-3
Names and Functions of
the Operation Screen.........................................5-4
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-14
Tool Auto Tuning ( Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)...............5-15
Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-32
Shortening the Processing Time....................5-40
Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting

an operation
Exiting the sensor settings and

starting an operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor. 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as
Settings Navigator.
2 Confirm that the operation screen opens.
Operating/Adjusting
2 Tap the [RUN] button.
If the image or status result does not update,

refer to
Troubleshooting (Page A-19).
The run screen opens and the operation starts.
When the power of the monitor is turned on for
the first time, the initial settings screen opens.
(Page 3-5)
5-2
If the image or status result does not update,

refer to
Troubleshooting (Page A-19).
Overview of the Operation Screen
Overview of the Operation Screen

Start screen
Menu OFF (Page 5-4)
Menu ON (Page 5-4)

(Page 5-5)
Hides the title and menu button, and displays
the entire image.
Changes the display magnification of an
image.
Display setting screen

Selects the [Tool View] and [Analysis] menu,
and set the information to display on the
monitor.
Statistics display screen
Histogram display screen
(Page 5-10)
(Page 5-12)
Displays the statistical

information of the status result.
Displays the histogram of the

status result.
Selecting the display

method of the tool.
(Page 5-7)
5-3
Operating/Adjusting
Zoom/Full-screen mode
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the ON/OFF of the menus.
Menu Screen
Menu OFF
zz
(8)
(1)
(2)
(10)
(11)
(3)
Menu ON
zz
(9)
(9)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(10)
(11)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Operating/Adjusting
(7)
(6)
(15)
(1) Title
Displays the device name (Page 6-29), program
number (Page 6-7), and program name of the
sensor (Page 6-12).
(2) Tool Name
Displays the tool number and tool name of the
tool selected on the monitor (Page 4-30).
The selected tool can also be switched.
(3) Brightness correction region
When the brightness correction is being set, the
brightness correction region will be displayed
with a blue frame.
(4) Tool window
Displays the tool region which has been set with
green frame when the status result is OK, and
displays with red frame when the status result is
NG.
The tool selected by tapping the region can also
be switched.
(5) Search region
If the search region of the selected tool is being
set to partial, the search region will be displayed
with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment
is being set, the search region after the position
adjustment will be displayed.
(6) [Menu] button
Switches to the display in Menu ON mode.
When the touch panel is locked, the
will
be displayed.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-50)
5-4
(16)
(17)
(18)
(7) [OFF] button

Switches to the display in Menu OFF mode.
(8) Status gauge
Displays status results (OK/NG) of the tool
selected on the monitor, a line indicating the
threshold, and a value of the matching rate.
When the status gauge is tapped, the operation
turns to Threshold Adjustment mode (Page 5-14).
Judge is OK (green)
Threshold
Judge is NG (red)
Matching rate
For details of the status results, refer to

(Page A-4).
(9) OK/NG display
Displays the total status result.
yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be
displayed. The total status conditions can be
selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/
[Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be
displayed.
(10) Processing time
Displays the time from receiving an external
trigger or an internal trigger to output the status
result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page
6-27), the ON-Delay Time is not included.
(11) Condition Display

Displays the Condition of the monitor.
......... Indicates Running.
......... Indicates Test mode. The status
result will not be output.
(12) [Trig] button
Displayed when an external trigger is set. A trigger
is issued by each tap on a button. This button is
used when the external trigger cannot be input.
The button can be set to be displayed or hidden.
Display Settings (Page 6-49)
When the [Zoom] button displayed in the Menu ON

screen is tapped, the title and menus displayed on
the monitor become hidden and the display will be
switched to the full-screen mode.
1 Tap the [Zoom] button.

If the [Zoom] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the screen.
(14) [View] button

Displays the menu to select display methods for
the tools and analysis screen.
Selecting a display method for tools
(Page 5-7)
(15) [Monitor Settings] button
Displays the Monitor Settings screen.
(Page 6-45)
5
Operating/Adjusting
(13) [Zoom] button

Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes
it possible to enlarge the images on the monitor.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)
Switching the display to the fullscreen mode
Switches to the full-screen mode.
(16) [Sensor Image History] button

Displays the Sensor Image History screen.
(17) [USB Memory] button
Displays the USB Memory screen.
a USB Memory (Page 6-18)
(18) [Sensor Setup] button
Stops the running mode to display the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
If the password lock has been set to the sensor,
will be displayed.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
(Page 6-7)
Password Lock (Page 6-30)
When [OFF] is selected in the display method of
the tool (Page 5-7), the tool name, search region,
tool window, and status gauge will be hidden.
5-5
Enlarging the image display

In the full-screen mode, the display magnification of
images can be changed.
1 Switch the display to the full-screen mode.

Switching the display to the full-screen
mode (Page 5-5)
2 Change the magnification ratio to the desired
ratio by tapping the
or
button.
Selecting the tool whose

information to be displayed
There are two methods for selecting the tool, whose
information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool
from the pull-down menu and (2) tapping the tool
window on the monitor
Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu
1 Select the tool whose information you
wish to display from the pull-down menu

by tapping the tool name.
Operating/Adjusting
Select the tool
Move button
Information of the selected tool will be displayed.

yyThe selectable ratios are 1.0x/1.5x/2.0x/3.0x.
yyThe display is enlarged each time you tap on
the [+] button.
yyThe display is reduced each time you tap on
the [-] button.
yyIn the enlarged display, the enlarged area
currently displayed is indicated at the left of
the [Back] button.
Enlarged area currently
displayed
Entire image
yyIf the [Back] button is tapped while the

image is enlarged, the screen returns to the
Menu ON screen maintaining the current
magnification ratio.
Information of
the selected tool
Selected tool
Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor
1 Tap the tool window of the tool whose

information you wish to display.
Selected tool
3 Adjust the display position of the enlarged

image as needed.
Tap the tool
yyYou can change the display position of the

enlarged image by tapping the move button or
swiping the image on the monitor.
yyIf you tap the [+] or [-] button after changing
the display position, the image will be
enlarged/reduced with reference to the
center of the image displayed on the monitor.
Information of the tapped tool will be displayed.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Back] button.
5-6
Information of
the tapped tool
tapped tool
Selecting a display method for tools

When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If one of the display methods for [Tool View] is selected
and the [OK] button is tapped, the display on the
monitor changes in accordance with the selected
display method.
Display methods for tools

Depending on the type of the sensor (color or
monochrome type), selectable display methods are
different.
For color type
OFF
zz
1 Tap the [View] button.
The tool windows and search regions of all tools

become hidden. The tool name and the status
gauge will also be hidden.
Window
zz
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are

displayed.
2 Tap the display method for [Tool View] in

accordance with the intended purpose.
Selected tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color
Area tool, the region that the tool window and
mask region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
For details of the display methods for [Tool View],
refer to
Display methods for tools (Page 5-7).

button.
The display method for tools changes in

accordance with the selected menu.
Non selected tools

thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will not
be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.
5-7
Operating/Adjusting
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]

button at the lower left corner of the monitor.
For monochrome type
Process 1
zz
OFF
zz
Outside the tool
window
Inside the tool
window
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the

following are different. The rest are the same.
Operating/Adjusting
Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome, and outside of the tool window
in color. Indicates the recognized outline with
a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
Process 2
zz
Outside the
search region
Inside the
search region
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,

the following are different. The rest are the same.
Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window and search
region in monochrome, and outside of the
search region in color.
If the brightness correction has been set,
inside the search region is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome. The extracted region is
displayed in the color of the target.
5-8
The tool windows and search regions of all tools

become hidden. The tool name and the status
gauge will also be hidden.
Window
zz
Selected tool
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area
tool, the region that the tool window and mask
region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
Non selected tools
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will not
be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.
Process
zz
Process 2
zz
Outside the
search region
Inside the
search region
Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series
of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
yyArea tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window will be displayed with
the corrected brightness and outside the tool
window will be displayed with the brightness
before correction.
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,
the following are different. The rest are the same.
Selected tool
Displays inside the search region with the
corrected brightness and outside the search
region with the brightness before correction.
Process 1
zz
Outside the tool

window
Inside the tool
window
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Selected tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series of
points in green (OK) or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window with the
corrected brightness and outside the tool
window with the brightness before correction.
5-9
5
Operating/Adjusting
This is selectable for the Area tool and for the

Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has
not been set.
Contents of the statistical information are as

follows.
Displaying the statistical

information
displayed.
If the [Statistics] button in the [Analysis] is selected,
the statistical information of judgment is displayed.
Displaying the statistical information
Operating/Adjusting

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the monitor.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Title
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29),
program number (Page 6-7), and program
name (Page 6-12).
(2) Position adjustment status result
When the position adjustment is being set, the
position adjustment status result of the latest
judgment process will be displayed.
(3) Tool status result
Displays the status result of the latest judgment
process for each tool set in the program.
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be

displayed.
2 Tap the [Statistics] button.
The statistical information will be displayed.
5-10
(4) [Reset] button

Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
(5) Processing time information
Displays information related to the processing
time.
yyTIME............ Displays the processing time of
the latest judgment process.
yyMAX............. Displays the maximum value of
the processing time.
yyMIN.............. Displays the minimum value of
yyAVE.............. Displays the average value of
(6) Trigger count information
Displays the information related to the number
of triggers.
yyTrigNo.......... Displays the total number of
triggers issued. This number
does not include the number of
trigger errors.
yyOK................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status OK.
yyNG................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status NG.
yyTrigErrNo...... Displays the number of triggers
issued as error triggers.
(7) OUT information

Displays the latest status results of items which
are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4)
(Page 4-60).
The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
displayed.
2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].
5
Operating/Adjusting
yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When

the number exceeds the upper limit, the
counter resets to 0 and starts counting
again.
yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrNo is
999999. The values display stops updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe statistical information is reset under the
following conditions.
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
the setting scale is changed by the user
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup
adjustment is started
- When the sensor is initialized
Hiding the statistical information
The statistical information becomes hidden.
5-11
Contents of the histogram are as follows.
Displaying the histogram

displayed.
If the [Histogram] button in the [Analysis] is
selected, the matching rate of the selected tool is
displayed as a histogram.
Displaying the histogram
Operating/Adjusting

monitor.

displayed.
The histogram appears.
(6)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(5)
(1) Title
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29),
program number (Page 6-7), and program
name (Page 6-12).
2 Tap the [Histogram] button.
(1)
(2) Tool Name

Displays the name of the tool whose histogram
is been shown. Tap the tool name to select the
tool whose histogram is you wish to display.
(3) Matching rate information
Displays the information related to the matching
rate.
yyMatch..........Displays the matching rate of the
latest judgment process.
yyMAX............Displays the maximum value of
the matching rate.
yyMIN.............Displays the minimum value of
the matching rate.
yyAVE.............Displays the average value of the
matching rate.
(4) Judgment Record
Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG.
yyOK...............Displays the process count for "OK".
yyNG...............Displays the process count for "NG".
If the judgment threshold is changed, the
histogram is updated according to the result
judged based on the changed threshold.
However, the judgment record retains the
counts judged based on the previous threshold.
Therefore, the judgment conditions on the
histogram may be different from the displayed
judgment record counts.
(5) [Reset] button
Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
(6) Tool status result
Displays the status results for the selected tool
as OK, NG, or -- (Pos.Adj. fails).
5-12
(7) Threshold
Displays the threshold for the selected tool.
yyThe upper limit of the judgment processing

count display for the judgment record is
999999. The values display stop updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999.
The values display stop updating when the
upper limit is reached.
yyThe histogram and judgement records are
reset under the following conditions.
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
the setting scale is changed by the user
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup
adjustment is started
- When the sensor is initialized

monitor.
displayed.
2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].
5
Operating/Adjusting
(8) Histogram
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution)
for the selected tool.
The range for OK is displayed in green and for
NG is displayed in red, having the threshold as
the boundary.
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution of the
matching rate. The display of
the range is fixed and cannot
be specified arbitrary.
yyVertical axis.......Adjusts automatically in
accordance with the maximum
value of the frequency. It
cannot be specified arbitrary.
yy .....................Displays the matching rate of
the latest judgment process.
Hiding the histogram
The histogram becomes hidden.
5-13
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

The method for manually adjusting the threshold
while in the Test mode.
The threshold adjustment can be started by the
[Limit Adjustment] button in the tool settings of the
Settings Navigator.
5 Adjust the threshold by checking the

matching rate.
<Setting example>
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

(Page 6-7)
Operating/Adjusting
Matching rate
The [Limit Adjustment] button is available only when

the program that the tool has been set is selected.
3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select

the tool to adjust the threshold from the pulldown menu and tap the [OK] button.
Select the tool
4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be

the reference of judgment.

button (Page 4-7) to image the target
by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.
Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes
by the
5-14
button.
Threshold

than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with the status result of the
tool, the display color of the tool changes.
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
slider or inputting values.
yyA target is judged by the new threshold from
the judgment process of the trigger output
after the threshold is changed.
yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking
the histogram result.
Displaying the histogram (Page 5-12)
The displayed contents are as follows.
- The histogram before threshold adjustment
is displayed.
- The status results during threshold
adjustment are not added to the frequency
distribution of the histogram.
- The counts for OK and NG are not displayed.
- The reset button is not displayed.
6 After the adjustment is completed, tap the

[OK] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

If a program is set with more than one tool, a
confirmation dialog for whether or not to adjust
threshold for other tools is displayed.
To adjust threshold for other tools, tap the [Yes]
button and repeat steps 3 to 6.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
Tool Auto Tuning

(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically
adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool
and the judgment threshold for each tool by using
multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and lowquality-targets (NG images).
There are three methods to register the image to
be used for Tool Auto Tuning.
Using the image history saved in the
sensor
This is the method to register the image as an OK

or an NG image to perform tuning while checking
the images read from the Sensor Image History.
Sensor Image History ( Confirming the Images
Using the images taken in the Test
mode
Perform tuning by reading the

images judged as OK or NG
from the Sensor Image History
Using the image files saved in the
USB memory
This is the method to register the image as

an OK or an NG image to perform tuning
while checking the images read from the USB
memory. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image
capture files (*.ivp) can be used.
Backing up in a batch (Page 6-19)
Capturing the screen (Page 6-23)
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
Perform tuning by
imaging targets which
are judged as OK or NG
USB
memory
Batch backup file (*.iva)
Image capture file (*.ivp)
Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK

or NG from the USB memory
5-15
Operating/Adjusting
This is the method to register the image as an

OK or an NG image to perform tuning while
preparing the multiple high and low-qualitytarget and checking the results of the test
operation.
Operation flow for the Tool Auto

Tuning
Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from

the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Start
yyThe position adjustment tool is not a target for

Tool Auto Tuning.
yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed
Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded
from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
Select
the tool
Operating/Adjusting
Select a starting
method

(Page 6-7)
2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
Image a target
Judgment of an
image?
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto

Tuning
Low-quality
High-quality
When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen
opens, tap the [Start] button.
AutoTune as
OK
AutoTune as
NG
3 If multiple tools are set in the program,
select the target tool for Tool Auto Tuning

from the pull-down menu, and tap the [OK]
button.
Automatically adjust the judgment

condition and threshold
Yes
Select the tool
Add image?*
The Start Up Menu screen for Tool Auto Tuning
opens.
No
Finish
* There are three methods to prepare images.
* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.
5-16
Use the registered information file

4 Select a starting method of Tool Auto Tuning. zz
Register from the beginning

zz
5 Select the registration source of the image

to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning
and register the image.
If the previous registration information has been

saved in the monitor, a confirmation dialog
asking whether or not to discard the previous
registration information appears.
For registration of an image taken during

zz
the Test mode
Registering the images taken in the Test

mode (Page 5-18)
For registration of an image history saved

zz
yyTap the [OK] button if you wish to discard the
previous registration information and perform
Tool Auto Tuning.
yyBy tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information and can be reused.
in the sensor
Registering the images from the image

history saved in the sensor (Page 5-20)
For registration of an image file saved in

zz
USB memory
Registering the images from the file saved

in the USB memory (Page 5-22)
Use the previous registered image

zz
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the OK/NG
image registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
yyWhen readjusting the tool settings after Tool
Auto Tuning and then repeating the Tool Auto
Tuning by the registered image.
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information (Page 5-26)
5-17
5
Operating/Adjusting

yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning for the first
time.
yyWhen redoing the image registration from the
beginning.
If the [Register from the beginning] is tapped,
the registration menu screen of Tool Auto
Tuning opens. Proceed to step 5.

yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning using the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory after
readjusting the tool settings
Tool Auto Tuning by the registration
information file (Page 5-28)
6 After the registration is completed, tap the

[Save] button.
Registering the OK/NG images to

be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
Registering the images taken in the
Test mode
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and
low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.
1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning.
Operating/Adjusting
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

(Page 5-16)
2 Tap the [Take a picture] button.
Adjusted results will be reflected and the

information dialog appears.
3 Image a high-quality-target to be the
criteria for the OK status or a low-qualitytarget to be the criteria for NG status.

button.
By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
information file and can be reused.
4 Check the displayed image and tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.
For Outline tool

zz
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu

screen.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.
5-18
For Color Area tool (color type)

zz
yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the brightness extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.

yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to
(Page 3-14).
button.
5-19
5
Operating/Adjusting

the color extraction area opens.
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
[+]/[-] button and expand/reduce the color area
to be extracted.
For Area tool (monochrome type)

zz
5 Check the changes in settings after the
auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]

button.
Changed
settings
5
Operating/Adjusting
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message

to change the tool settings or the image to be
registered.
Registering the images from the image

history saved in the sensor
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the Sensor Image History.
1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Tuning.

(Page 5-16)
2 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button.
The type of an image to be registered will be

displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy
: Registers as an OK image.
yy
: Registers as an NG image.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.
6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.
The Sensor Image history screen opens.
3 Tap the image history to be the OK or NG

image and tap the [Zoom] button.
Select the
image
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG

images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

[No] button on the confirmation dialog.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool

Auto Tuning.
(Page 5-16)
5-20
The selected image will be enlarged.

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
button.
yyBy tapping [<]/[>] button, you can check the

other images in enlarged display.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen is
the status result by the settings at the time
of saving the image. If the tool settings are
changed after the image is saved, only the
frame of the tool window will be displayed
regardless of selection of the tool display
method (Page 5-7). The processing status
will not be displayed.
For Outline tool

zz

zz


[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.


refer to
(Page 3-14).
button.

button.
5-21
5
Operating/Adjusting

zz


button.
Changed
settings
5
Operating/Adjusting

registered.
yy
yy
Registering the images from the file

saved in the USB memory
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the USB memory.
1 Connect the USB memory on which the
batch backup files (*.iva) and image

capture files (*.ivp) are saved, to the USB
connector of the monitor.
2 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Tuning.

(Page 5-16)
3 Tap the [USB Memory Image] button.

6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

The USB Memory Image screen opens.
7 After the registration is completed, tap the 4 Select a batch backup file (*.iva) or image
Auto Tuning.
(Page 5-16)
capture file (*.ivp) and tap the [OK] button.
Select a file to be
loaded
File formats other than *.iva or *.ivp cannot

be loaded.
For details of selecting files in the USB
memory, refer to
5-22
5 When the batch backup file (*.iva) is
selected, tap the image history to be the

OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.

zz
Select the
image
The selected image will be enlarged.
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]

button.
yyWhen a batch backup file (*.iva) has been

selected, you can check the other images in
enlarged display by tapping the [<]/[>] button.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen
for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status
result by the settings at the time of saving
the image.
yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the
image will be displayed.
For Outline tool

zz



button.
5-23
5
Operating/Adjusting

[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.

zz
5
Operating/Adjusting


button.
Changed
settings

registered.
yy
yy

8 Tap the [Yes] button and register the

images repeatedly.

refer to
(Page 3-14).
button.
5-24
yyIf the batch backup file (*.iva) is selected,

repeat steps 5 to 7.
yyIf the image capture file (*.ivp) is selected,
repeat steps 4 to 7.


Auto Tuning.
(Page 5-16)
Confirming or deleting the images

registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for
the Tool Auto Tuning.
1 Display the main screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning.

(Page 5-16)
2 Tap the [Confirmation of Registered Image]
Operating/Adjusting
button.
3 Confirm or delete the OK/NG image.
yy[First].................Displays the first image.

yy[<]......................Displays the previous image.
yy[>]......................Displays the next image.
yy[Last].................Displays the last image.
yy[Delete]..............Deletes the displayed image.
The setting is re-adjusts by
using the remaining images.

[Close] button.

Tool Auto Tuning.
5-25
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous

registration information
5
Operating/Adjusting
When the information of Tool Auto Tuning

performed before turning off power of the monitor
or before disconnecting with the sensor (previous
registration information) is used, the Tool Auto
Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG
image registration process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG image registered with the previous Tool Auto
Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen (Page 6-7)
When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen

opens, tap the [Start] button.
select the target tool for the Tool Auto

Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
Select the tool
Previous registration information

OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.
Tuning based on the OK/NG images registered

in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
The previous registration information is saved in

the memory (RAM) inside the monitor, and remains
available until the power of the monitor is turned off
or the monitor is disconnected with the sensor.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using
the same previous registration information, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).
5-26
4 Tap the [Use the previous registered image] 7 After the registration is completed, tap the
button.
[Save] button.
Re-adjustment is performed by using the

previous registration information.
5 Check the changes made by
the re-adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
Operating/Adjusting
The information dialog appears.
The adjustment result is reflected and the

Changed
settings
The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.
6 To add images, register the OK/NG images.

for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-18)

information file and can be reused.
screen.
5-27
Tool Auto Tuning by the registration

information file
5
Operating/Adjusting
When the registration information file (*.ivt), which

contains the Tool Auto Tuning images and criteria
information saved at the end of the previous Tool
Auto Tuning is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be
performed skipping the OK/NG image registration
process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG images registered with the previous Tool
Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.
USB
memory
Registered information file (*.ivt)
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
1 Prepare the registration information file

(*.ivt).
A registration information file is saved at the

Tool Auto Tuning finish screen.
For the saving method, refer to the step 8 of
(Page 5-16).

(Page 6-7)
When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens,

tap the [Start] button.
select the target tool for the Tool Auto

Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
OK
Select the tool
Tuning based on the OK/NG images in the

registration information file
This is the function for the monitor operation software

version R1.10 or later. For the versions older than
R1.10, update the software to the latest version.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning
using the same registration information file, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).
5-28
The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.
5 Tap the [Use the registered information file] 7 Tap the [Go] button.
button.
The import screen for registration information

file appears.
Re-adjustment is performed by using the

registered information file.
5
Operating/Adjusting
6 Select the registered information file (*.ivt)

Select the file to

be imported
The information dialog appears.
8 Check the changes made by the re-
adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
yyFiles with the formats other than ivt format

cannot be used.
yyIf the confirmation dialog appears, change
the registration file to be imported according
to the message.
yyFor the monitor operation software version
R1.10, this file cannot be use. Update the
software to the latest version.
memory, refer to Selecting the file in the USB
memory (Page 3-17).
The confirmation screen opens.
Changed
settings
The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.
9 To add images, register the OK/NG images.

for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-18)
5-29

[Save] button.
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusted results will be reflected and the


information and can be reused.
screen.
5-30
MEMO
5
Operating/Adjusting
5-31
Stabilizing the Judgment Process

This section explains how to adjust the device
when the judgment process is not stable.
To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary
to take a clear image of the target and adjust the
detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner.
5
Operating/Adjusting
yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging

the target (Page 5-32)
- Adjust the installation distance to image the
target widely
- Correct the distorted image due to the installation
- Make the image bright enough
- Focus well
- Make the image blur less
- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
- Make the image less influenced by the lighting
condition
yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the
target (Page 5-36)
yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-38)
yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-39)

taking a clear image of the target
Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can
take images with which the detection tools can clearly
recognize differences between high and low-qualitytarget.
Imaging the target widely

The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large
image of the target onto the screen.
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)
Install the sensor close to the target.

Install the sensor at the appropriate distance
from the target upon checking the field of view
and the installed distance of the sensor.
Checking the view and installed distance
(Page 2-2)
: Adequate
: Inadequate
If the judgment process is adjusted to make it

stabilize, the process time may become longer
depending on the function used. Adjust the
judgment process while confirming the balance
within the process time.
Using the digital zooming function
For the monochrome type, the target can be

imaged larger using the digital zooming function.
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)
(Page 4-19)
5-32
Correcting the distorted images due to

the installation
If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target
due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to
prevent a shine on the targets surface, the target
image may become trapezoidally distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and
displays them without distortion.
Tilt Correction (Page 6-38)
Achieving adequate image brightness

If the image is too dark, the judgment process for
high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due
to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright,
the judgment process may become unstable.
Brightness can be adjusted in Auto Brightness
Adjustment.
Indicator light
Top view
Target
Finer brightness adjustments can be made in

Advanced Brightness Adjustment.
(Page 4-18)
Target
Lateral view
Bright
zz
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer
exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.
Before tilt
correction
After tilt correction

(vertical)
Imaging Mode
zz
When "HighGain" is selected in the imaging
mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases and the screen becomes brighter.
due to uneven brightness
Refer to
Reducing the shininess of the
glossy or metal surface (Page 5-35).
5-33
5
Operating/Adjusting
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment
Achieving good focus
Reducing the image blur
Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of

the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be
adjusted easily in the Auto Focus Adjustment. For
the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted
while confirming the image and focus indicator.
If the image is blurred by imaging a moving

target, the image blurring can be corrected by
shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust
the exposure time with the advanced brightness
adjustment.
the Auto Focus Adjustment
Operating/Adjusting
The focusing position may not be adjusted

correctly if the image is too dark or too bright.
Adjust to the applicable brightness with Auto
Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) and then
perform the auto focus adjustment.
If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the auto
focus adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust
the focus manually.
adjusted manually (Page 4-13)
Exposure time
Bright
zz
When the value of brightness is reduced, the
exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a
less blurry image.
Imaging Mode
zz
Select [HighGain] in the imaging mode so that
the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen
becomes brighter so that the exposure time can
be shortened and the image blurring can be
reduced. The image noise may increase.
Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the
[HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.
Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-]

button.
5-34
By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing

filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened
as the exposure time can be shortened.
Reducing the shininess of the glossy

or metal surface
Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in
light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a
high-light intensity, the amount of light received will
be saturated and the surface will shine. This section
explains how to reduce the shininess.
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment
Use the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/

OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the
polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror
reflection and reduce the shine on the targets
surface.
(Page 2-7)
Installing the sensor at an angle
The built-in lighting will not reflected back into

the camera, so the shine on the targets surface
can be reduced.
This is effective for flat-surface targets.
When the sensor is
installed in front of
the target
When the sensor is

installed at an angle
from the target
Using the dome attachment
Use the dome attachment (IV-D10).

The dome attachment emits even diffused light
from the entire circumference to the target, so
that the contrast becomes less and the shine on
the targets surface is reduced.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)
Dome attachment
The mirror reflection

of the built-in light
reflects into the
camera and causes
the surface to shine.
The mirror reflection

of the built-in light
does not reflect into
the camera so no
surface shine occurs.
If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor,

the image can be corrected by the tilt
correction function.
Diffusion
light
Target
5-35
5
Operating/Adjusting
If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled

automatically and it can be reduced by using
the auto brightness adjustment.
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is
a function that prevents light saturation in the
shining area by imaging the target with a wider
dynamic range. The HDR function can also be
adjusted manually.
(Page 4-18)
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)

Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color
type image is different from that of the target.
Reducing the effect of illumination

variation
5
Operating/Adjusting
If the detection is not stable due to the ambient

light from the surroundings where the sensor is
installed, the effect of the illumination variation can
be reduced by the brightness correction function.
If the detection cannot be stabilized with the
brightness correction function, use a shielding
around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light.
Brightness correction (Page 4-26)
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned

target position
If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning
of the target, the position to be judged is also declined
from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The detection can be stabilized by using the
position adjusting function.
Tool settings
Master image
Tool window
Processing during an operation
Tool window
Search region of the tool window
5-36
Stabilizing the position adjustment

This section explains how to adjust when the
position adjustment is not stable.
adjustment becomes unstable

Search region
Rotation range
Basic adjustments
Set the position adjustment window as large as possible

by selecting a part that contains a unique shape.
If there are many variation of a target shapes
that a position adjustment window has been set,
set the threshold which has lower matching rate.
Since the convex part assigned in the position

adjustment window does not exist in any other
part of the target, the position adjustment can
be performed correctly without being recognition
error.
: Bad example
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target

exceeds the rotation range (default value: 20).
Rotation Range (Page 4-57)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool
window will search with the range few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation
range. (The tool window will search few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
Margin (Page 4-57)
Search Region
zz
Broaden the search region if the variation in the
position determining of the target exceeds the
region to be searched.
Example 1
Example 2
unstable due to the effect of the

unwanted outlines
The position adjustment cannot function

correctly in the following examples.
Example 1: The straight line that the position
adjustment window is set cannot be
identified uniquely because there
are many similar straight lines exist
in other parts of the target.
Example 2: The angle section that the position
adjustment window is set cannot be
identified uniquely because there
are many similar angle sections exist
in other parts of the target.
yyThe outline disabling function can disable

unwanted outlines.
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
5-37
Operating/Adjusting
: Good example
Rotation Range
zz
cannot be detected
5
Operating/Adjusting
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline

may not be extracted. Set the extraction
sensitivity to [High].
If the process remain unstable even after
setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is
necessary to adjust the exposure condition for
the target.
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-19)
Stabilizing the Outline tool

This section explains how to adjust the outline tool
when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
is not stable.
Basic adjustments
yySet the tool window as large as possible by

selecting a part contains a unique shape.
yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized,
set the search region so that no outlines are
searched beyond the target area.
yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the
high and low-quality-target. The judgment
condition and threshold can also be optimized
automatically to the most appropriate condition
and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)
If the outline cannot be detected when
the target becomes out of position
Adjust the search region. Broaden the search

region if the varies of the position determining of
the target exceeds the region to be searched.
If the detection becomes unstable due
to the effect of the unwanted outline

other than the target
yyThe outline disabling function can disable

unwanted outlines.
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy].
Search Algorithm (Page 4-38)
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.
5-38
If the target tilts and the outline
cannot be detected
If the match rate difference between the
high and low-quality-targets is small
Adjust the search algorithm.

If there is no difference between the match rate
for high and low-quality-target, select the [High
Accuracy]. This will result in better judgment
accuracy. However, the processing time becomes
longer.
If the outline of the target cannot be
detected
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline

may not be extracted. Set the extraction
sensitivity to [High].
If the process remain unstable even after setting
the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary
to adjust the exposure condition for the target.
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-19)
This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/

Area tool when the judgment for the high and lowquality-target is not stable.
Basic adjustments
Adjust the threshold to the average of the high

and low-quality-target. The color extraction range,
brightness extraction range and threshold can also
be optimized automatically to the most appropriate
ranges and values by using the tool auto tuning.
If the color you wish to judge cannot
be extracted
yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to

be the reference for judgment.
y
y By repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or
brightness, the extraction range can be added.
yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction
range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons).
Tap the [+] button to expand the color or
brightness range currently being extracted.
Tap the [-] button to reduce the range.
Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)
yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable].
Extended functions of the Color Area/
If the area search becomes unstable
due to unwanted colors being extracted

Adjust with the mask function. The region in
which unwanted colors are extracted can be
disabled.
Mask settings (Page 4-45)
5-39
5
Operating/Adjusting
yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation

range if the tilt of the target exceeds the
rotation range (default value: 20).
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will
search with the range few degrees wider
than the setting value of rotation range. (The
tool window will search few degrees even if
the rotation range is set to 0.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
Margin (Page 4-37)
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool
Shortening the Processing Time
5
Operating/Adjusting
This section explains how to adjust the device to

shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform
adjustments to shorten the processing times of the
imaging process and the detection tools.
yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools
(Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool
(Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/
yyShorten the processing time of the position
adjustment (Page 5-42)
For the processing time

The processing time is the period of time from when
an external or internal trigger is received until the
status result is finalized.
The processing time is displayed at the upper right
of the run screen or the test screen.
Processing time
Flow of the internal process
If the processing time is shortened, the stability of

judgment may decrease. The processing time should
therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining
balance with the stability of the judgment process.
Trigger input
Imaging
(Tilt Correction)
(Brightness
Correction)
(Position
Adjustment)
Processing time
Tool 1 process
Tool 2 process
Tool n process
Status output
Methods to shorten the processing time are as

follows.
yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of each tool.
yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction,
brightness correction, and position adjustment).
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use a field network.
5-40
Shortening the imaging processing

time
Imaging Area
zz
The processing time can be shortened by
adjusting the imaging area.
Entire imaging area (default value)
Reduce the imaging area

each tool
Shortening the processing time of the
Outline tool
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
the settings for the search region, rotation range,
and search algorithm.
Search region
Rotation range
Operating/Adjusting
Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging

area from Entire (default value) to Partial. The
processing time for capturing the image in Nonimaged area can be shortened. The importing
time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical
direction (V).
Imaging Area (Page 4-17)
Exposure Time
zz
Search Region
zz
The searching time can be shortened by

reducing the search region and setting the
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Make sure that the range of position determining
of the target does not exceed the search region.
Rotation Range
zz
The processing time can be shortened by

shortening the exposure time (Page 4-18). The
longer exposure time makes the processing
time longer than the displayed exposure time.
By unmounting the dome attachment or
polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time
can be shortened.
Selecting the tool
The target search time while rotating the master

image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
Make sure that the range of an installation angle
of the target does not exceed the rotation range.
Search Algorithm
zz
Select the [High Speed]. This will decrease the

judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be
shorter.
Producing an image with less unwanted

zz
The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool

will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you
should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever
possible.
outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images

with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
5-41


position adjustment
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting

the window shape settings.
When the position adjustment is performed, the

processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
search region settings or rotation range settings.
Window shape
Search region
Rotation range
5
Operating/Adjusting
Window Shape
zz
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce
the window shape by modifying the setting to
[ Rect] or [ Circle].
The processing time can be shortened by reducing
the time required for the area processing.
Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)
Search Region
zz
The searching time can be shortened by
reducing the search region and setting the
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Note that the range of the target position that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
Rotation Range
zz
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
Producing an image with less

zz
unnecessary outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images

with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
5-42
6
Useful Features/
Various Functions
This chapter explains the useful features of the sensor

and the monitor. The Sensor Setup Menu screen, the
Sensor Advanced screen, and the Monitor Settings
screen are also explained.
6-1
6
List of the Useful Features................................6-2

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen.....6-7
Changeover for a Target
(Program Functions)..........................................6-8
Sensor Image History (Confirming
the Images whose Status Result is NG).........6-14
Saving the Sensor Settings and
Images to a USB Memory................................6-18
Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor.........................................................6-25
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information....6-45
List of the Useful Features

Useful features while running
Items
Things you want to do
6
Analysis
Reference
page
Up to 32 types (products) of
products can be registered
and loaded.
6-8
Assign a name to the settings

of each product for easy
Program function
identification
A name can be assigned to

the used program.
6-12
Prevent misoperation by the

operator
Misoperation can be prevented by

yyPassword Lock
yyTouch Screen Lock setting a password on the monitor.
6-30
6-50
Assign a name to each

sensor for easy identification
Device Name
A device name and a study name

can be assigned to the sensor.
6-29
Automatically register the

master image
External master
registration
Registers the master image

from external input.
6-26
Automatically save and

confirm the NG images
Sensor Image
History
The latest 100 images (in color)

or 300 images (in monochrome)
can be saved into the memory of
the sensor and confirmed them.
6-14
Confirm the image history in

the sensor saved as a batch
backup file (*.iva).
The sensor image history can

Simulator functions
be confirmed by opening the
of IV-Navigator
batch backup file.
Specify a screen and save it

to a USB memory
Screen Capture
Tap the title on the desired

screen to capture it.
6-23
Check the operation status

statistically
Statistical process
screen
The statistical data of the

processing times and results
can be confirmed.
5-10
Check the operation status

with a histogram
Histogram screen
The status result of each

tool can be displayed in the
histogram screen.
5-12
FTP client function
Data of the images captured

by the sensor and the status
result information can be
automatically transferred to
an FTP server.
6-32
Automatically save data

of the images captured by
the sensor and the status
result information outside the
sensor
6-2
Description
Program function
Change over the program
Operation
Useful functions
1-5
Items
Useful functions
Description
Reference
page
The menu and title can be

hidden and the image will be
displayed in full-screen.
5-5
Zoom in/out the images
Zoom button
The zoom ratio can be

changed to x 1/x 1.5/x 2/x 3.
5-6
Adjust the brightness of the

backlight
Backlight
The brightness of the backlight

can be adjusted between 7 levels.
6-52
Dim the backlight when not in

use
Backlight
The monitor can be set to dim

automatically when not used
for a specific period of time.
6-52
Change the display language Language
The language can be changed

to Japanese, English,
Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified),
Chinese (Traditional), Italian,
French, Spanish, Portuguese
or Korean.
6-51
Hide the trigger button
The [Trig] button displayed

when the external trigger is
selected can be hidden.
6-49
If the image is not need to be

displayed, the screen update
can become faster by setting to
display the status result only.
6-49
Display
Manual Trigger
Update Image in
Make the screen update faster
RUN Mode
6-3
6
Confirm images hidden under

Zoom button
the menu or title
Useful features during installation/adjustment

Items
Stabilize the detection

Judgment Shorten the process time
process Issue an internal trigger and
perform judgment process
within the shortest cycle
Adjust the threshold for the

Threshold detection by using the saved
images
Prevent internal lighting from

blinking
Imaging
6-4
Description
Reference
page
Adjusts the sensor installation

and the settings navigator.
5-32
Adjusts the settings navigator.
5-40
Sets the trigger interval to 1ms.
7-3
Tool Auto Tuning
The threshold can be set

automatically by selecting an
image and specifying to OK or NG.
5-15
The light can be set to stay lit at

Continuous lighting all times by synchronizing with
the trigger.
4-18
Useful functions
Tilt Correction
The distorted images due to

the limitations for the sensor
installation can be corrected
and displayed correctly.
6-38
Adjust the color tint (white

balance)
White Balance
The color tint can be adjusted

and displayed correctly.
6-41
Correct the images of a

target that are rotated 180
Rotate 180
The image of a target can be

rotated 180 without adjusting
the sensor's position.
6-40
Correct the distorted images

due to being taken from an
angle
Items
Useful functions
Description
Reference
page
Confirm/edit the settings or

confirm the operation results
without connecting to the
sensor.
The settings can be confirmed

or edited by using a batch
Simulator functions
backup files (*.iva). Also,
of IV-Navigator
the operation results can be
simulated.
Back up the settings to the

USB memory
Batch Backup
The settings for the sensor

can be read and saved into
the USB memory.
6-19
Copy the settings to multiple

sensors
Transfer Program
Settings
The batch backup data stored

into the USB memory can be
transferred to another sensor.
6-21
Copy the settings and use

the settings to set another
product
Program function
The settings of a set program

number which has been set
can be copied to another
program number.
6-12
Confirm the settings of the

sensor with the list.
Export functions of
IV-Navigator
The list of settings can be

confirmed with Microsoft Excel
etc.
1-5
Initialize the settings of the

sensor
Initialize Sensor
The settings can be initialized

to the factory default.
6-44
Initialize the settings of the

monitor
Initialize Monitor
The settings can be initialized

6-53
Confirm the version of the

sensor
Sensor Information
The version for the model or

the operation software can be
confirmed.
6-43
Confirm the version of the

monitor
The version for the model or

Monitor Information the operation software can be
confirmed.
6-53
1-5
6-5
6
Settings
Items
Description
Reference
page
The operation test for the input

and output line can be performed.
6-28
Switch to NPN output or PNP

Polarity
output
The polarity can be changed

to NPN or PNP according to
the controlling device used.
6-28
Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output Settings
The settings for each OUT can

be changed to N.O. or N.C.
6-27
Output the status output with

one-shot
Common Output
Settings
The output can be changed

from latching output to oneshot output.
6-27
Output the status output with

on-delay
Common Output
Settings
On-delay time can be set for

the one-shot output.
6-27
Switch the external trigger to

rise or fall
Input Settings
Rising trigger or falling

trigger can be selected as
the operation of the external
trigger
6-26
Output the NG status results
Total status NG
output
When the total status result

of each detection tool was
NG, the total status NG output
function turns ON.
4-60
Confirm whether or not the

sensor is running properly
RUN output
When the sensor is running

with no system error occurring,
the output function turns ON.
4-60
Form a logical operation of

status result
Logic output
Logical operation result of each

detection tool can be assigned
to the output function.
4-63
Change the total status

conditions
Total status
conditions
The total status conditions can

be selected from [All Tools OK]/
[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic
4].
4-65

Confirm whether or not the
input and output lines are
correctly wired
6
I/O lines
6-6
Useful functions
I/O Monitor

This section explains the Sensor Setup Menu
screen, which is displayed by tapping the [Setup]
button when the menu display of the monitor is ON.
1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
(2) [Detail] button

By tapping the [Detail] button, the Program
Details screen opens. The master image can be
confirmed and the program name can be edited.
Editing a program name (Page 6-12)
Copying a program (Page 6-12)
Initializing a program (Page 6-13)
(3) Master image
Displays the master image registered to the
currently selected program. If no master image is
registered, the [No Master Image] will be displayed.
(4) [Sensor Setup] button
Start the Settings Navigator.
(5) [Limit Adjustment] button
Adjusts the threshold of the tool registered in
the currently selected program.
(6) [Tool Auto Tuning] button

Performs the auto tuning of the tool registered
in the currently selected program.
The displayed items are as follows.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) Program
Displays the program number of the selected
program. The program can be switched from
the pull-down menu.
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
(Page 6-8)
(7) [Sensor Advanced] button

Performs the advanced settings for the sensor.
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor
(Page 6-25)
(8) [Sensor Image History] button
Displays the image history saved in the sensor.
(9) [USB Memory] button
Operates the USB memory connected to the
monitor.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory (Page 6-18)
(10) [RUN] button
Starts running the sensor.
6-7
6

Overview of the program functions
The sensor can save the judgment condition set in
the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types
(32 products).
By reading the judgment condition which has been
saved according to each product, changeover can
be done easily.
Sensor
PROG31 : Product XX
PROG02 : Product C
Things can be performed with

the program functions
yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment
conditions (programs).
yyReads and operates the saved program.
Using the program functions (changing over)
(Page 6-10)
yySelects the reading method of the program.
Program Switch Method (Page 6-42)
yyNames the judgment conditions (programs).
PROG01 : Product B
yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs).

PROG00 : Product A
Settings Navigator
*1
yyImaging settings
yyMaster image
*2
yyTool settings
yyOutput Assignment
yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to

the status before setting.
Sensor Advanced
yyEnvironmental
yySetup Adjustment
yySwitching programs
*1
*2
6-8
The auto focus type includes the focusing

position.
Including the threshold of each tool.
Preparing the program functions

Registers the judgment condition for each product
to the program before running.
Preparation flow
(1) Select a program number
Select a program number to register a judgment
condition from PROG00 to PROG31.
Preparation procedures

(Page 6-7)
2 Select a program number to register a

judgment condition of a product.
(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings

Navigator
Set the judgment condition for a product in the
Settings Navigator.
The following functions can be used with the

preparations for the program function.
yyThe product name can be registered to the
program.
yyTo register a similar product, the program can
be copied, and then the settings can be edited.
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition
registered in the program to the status before
setting.
6
The program can also be selected from the
[Detail] button (Page 6-7).
3 Set a judgment condition in the Settings

Navigator.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs

for the number of products that are to be
changed over.
6-9
(3) Select a program switch method

Select a switch method. There are methods
such as switching from the external input line or
switching by tapping the monitor.
Select the
program
5 Select a program switch method.
Using the program functions

(changing over)
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the
Program Switch Method
6

yyMonitor/PC........Switching by tapping the
monitor screen or operating
from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
or the field network.
yyExternal IN........Switching by inputting signals
from PLC to the input line of
the sensor.

(Page 6-7)
2 Select the program number that the

product to be judged is registered.
Select the
program
6 If the [External IN] is selected in the
program switch method, set the input

terminal.

The bit to be set differs depending on the
product numbers to be registered.
Product numbers to
be registered
(Program numbers)
2
bit to be assigned
to the input line
3 Tap the [RUN] button and the run mode

will start with the new program.
bit0
3 to 4
bit0/bit1
5 to 8
bit0/bit1/bit2
9 to 16
bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3
17 to 32
bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
Setup example
When 7 types of products are to be registered,
bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN
terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.
6-10
The program number can also be selected

while confirming a master image with the
[Detail] button (Page 6-7).
For details of how to switch from the IV-Navigator

(IV-H1), refer to "IV Series User's Manual (PC
Software)".
When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method
1 Start the run mode.
Starting an Operation (Page 5-2)
2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
of the input line.
Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26)
to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.
Program
number
bit4
(MSB)
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
(LSB)
Program
number
PROG00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROG16
bit4
(MSB)
ON
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
(LSB)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
PROG17
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PROG18
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PROG03
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
PROG19
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
PROG04
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
PROG20
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
PROG05
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PROG21
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PROG06
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
PROG22
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
PROG07
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
PROG23
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
PROG08
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROG24
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROG09
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
PROG25
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
PROG10
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PROG26
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PROG11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
PROG27
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
PROG12
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
PROG28
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
PROG13
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
PROG29
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
PROG14
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
PROG30
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
PROG15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
PROG31
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN]

yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP]

ON :
OFF :
ON :
OFF :
the state shorted with 0 V line

Open
the state that voltage is applied
Open
For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to
Changing Over (Page 7-7).
6-11
6
PROG01
PROG02
Editing a program name
Copying a program
Tap the [Detail] button in the Sensor Setup Menu

screen and edit the program name.
Copies a set program to another program number.

Re-uses the set items and creates a new program.
2 Tap the [Detail] button.
3 Select the program to change the name
3 Select the program number to be copied

(Page 6-7)
The Program Details screen opens.
and tap the [Edit] button.

(Page 6-7)
and tap the [Copy] button.
Select the
program
The selected program can be moved by tapping

the [<] or [>] button.
The screen to edit the program name opens.
Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK]

button.
Select the
program

4 Select the program number to be the copy

destination and tap the [Go] button.
Select the
program
number

The system returns to the Program Details screen.
the program name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
The copy source program is copied to the copy

destination.
Copied program
6-12
Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the
default.

(Page 6-7)
3 Select the program to be initialized and

tap the [Initialize] button.
6
Select the
program

The system returns to the Program Details screen.

The initialized program becomes [No Master Image].
6-13
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition,
it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.
yyNG images only (default value).... Saves the images whose total status result was NG.
yyAll images..................................... Saves all the images that were judged.
Loads the saved images into the monitor and the images can be used for confirming the causes and
tendency of the NG result.
The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 100 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 300 images
The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 70 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 210 images
6
Since the memory of the sensor image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power
is turned OFF.
To save the images, batch back up the images into a USB memory.
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

This section explains how to display the Sensor Image History screen.
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor Image History screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is displayed from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Displaying from the run screen
Tap the [Sensor Image History] button

when the menu display of the monitor is
set to ON.
The Sensor Image History screen opens.
6-14
Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button in

The Sensor Image History screen opens.

images
The View screen opens.

(1)
Displays the image history in the sensor.
1
2
(2)
Display the Sensor Image History screen.

(Page 6-14)
Tap the [View] button.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Page number

Indicates the page number of the image history.
When displaying from the run screen, the

confirmation dialog appears. Select whether or
not to pause.
When the operation is not paused
yyThe added or overwritten history image will
not be updated automatically. For updating,
close the history image display once and
then display it again.
yyWhen the history image is erased by
overwriting and updating in the sensor
during displaying on the monitor, it may not
be displayed again on the monitor.
For details of the number of triggers,

refer to
Displaying the statistical information
(Page 5-10).
(3) Detailed information
Displays the detailed information for the
selected thumbnail image.
Displays the program number, program name,
number of triggers, status results for the position
adjustment, and the status results for each tool.
(4) Operation buttons
Selects a thumbnail image.
yy[First].................Moves to the first page of the
image history.
yy[<<]....................Moves to the previous page.
yy[<]......................Moves to the previous history.
yy[>]......................Moves to the next history.
yy[>>]....................Moves to the next page.
yy[Last].................Moves to the last page of the
image history.
(5) [Batch Backup] button
Backs up the images in a batch.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-19)
To back up the images in a batch from
the View screen, the saving target will be
[Prog.+Image Hist.].
6-15
6
(2) Thumbnail images

Displays the number of triggers, total status
result, and thumbnail image.
(6) [View] button

Zooms in on the selected image history on the
monitor.
Clearing the saved images

Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.
1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.

(Page 6-14)
2 Tap the [Clear] button.
yy[<] button
Moves to the previous history.
yy[>] button
Moves to the next history.
yy[Save to USB Memory] button
Saves the displayed image to the USB memory.
Saving the image history individually (Page 6-20)
yy[Auto Tuning] button
Performs auto tuning based on the displayed
history.
The image history will be cleared and the

system returns to the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyTitle
Displays the program number, program name
and number of triggers.
In the following cases, characters of the title
are displayed in yellow.
yyImages which the tool settings was changed
after image history saving
yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed
Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process]
is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only
the tool window is displayed and the process
contents are not displayed.
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the run screen or the
Sensor Setup Menu screen.
6-16

the image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
the image history.
1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.

Display the Sensor Image History screen from
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when
it is selected from the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

(Page 6-14)
2 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.
3 Select a logging condition.
yyAll......................Saves all the images to the

image history regardless of
the status result.
yyNG only.............Only saves the images whose
status result is NG to the
image history.
The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu

screen.
6-17
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

a USB Memory
Connect the USB memory to the monitor so that
the data backup, settings data transfer, and screen
capture can be performed.
Installing/Removing the USB memory

Installing the USB memory
1 Open the cover of the USB connecting

connector on the monitor.
2 Connect the USB memory to the USB
Displaying the USB Memory screen

This section explains how to display the USB
Memory screen.
There are two methods for displaying the USB
Memory screen.
The items can be set are the same for the two methods.
Displaying from the run screen
1 Tap the [USB Memory] button with the state that

the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.
connector.
The USB Memory screen opens.
Supported formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32
Removing the USB memory

The USB memory can be removed at any time,
except while a progress bar or a dialog indicating that
a saving process is in progress is being displayed.
1 Remove the USB memory from the USB

connecting connector.
The [Batch Backup] button and [Transfer

Program Settings] button are available only
when the USB memory is attached.
Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [USB Memory] button in the

The USB Memory screen opens.

6-18

the image history
Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB
memory in a batch.
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
The image history of the batch backup data can be
confirmed by the simulation function of IV-Navigator.


(Page 6-18)
2 Display the USB Memory screen.
Displaying the USB Memory screen (Page 6-18)
3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button.
Displays the name of the folder to be created on

the USB memory. "Device name_Last 24bit of
the MAC address" will be automatically set.
File Name
zz
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the
[Edit] button and the name can be edited to the
arbitrary name.
Save
zz
Selects the backup target.
yyProgram Only....Backs up the sensor settings
(the Sensor Setup (Settings
Navigator) and Sensor
Advanced settings of all
programs).
Prog.+
.......Backs up all the images in the
yy
Image Hist.
image history as well as the
sensor settings.
When the image history has been saved
[During operation], the image being the saving
object may be updated and deleted during the
batch backup. A deleted image is not saved.
Because of this, saving [During setting] is
recommended.
File Size
zz
Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy)
and the free space of the USB memory.
5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go]

button.
The Batch Backup screen opens.
4 Perform the Batch Backup settings.
After the batch backup completes, the backup

result appears on the monitor.
6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]

button.

6-19
6
yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup

of the data saved in the sensor in case of
malfunction of the product.
yyThe saving time increases when this is
performed in [During operation]. Execution while
in the [During setting] status is recommended.
Folder
zz
Saving the image history individually


(Page 6-18)
2 Display the zoom-in screen of the image

history screen.
Loading and confirming the saved images

(Page 6-15)
3 Tap the [Save to USB Memory] button.
4 Edit the file name as needed and tap the

[Go] button.
The image history will be saved to the USB

memory and the storage result appears.
The system returns to the zoom-in screen of the

image history screen.
6-20
Transferring the settings backed up

in the USB memory to the sensor
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved
in the USB memory to the sensor.

(Page 6-18)

(Page 6-18)
3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.
6
The screen to select the setting data opens.
5 Select the batch backup file to be
transferred (*.iva), and tap the [OK] button.

memory, refer to
The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.
6-21
yyOperations cannot be cancelled during

transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved in
the sensor in a batch beforehand.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-19)
yyThe image data in the image history will not be
transferred.
yyThe settings file of a different model of the
sensor cannot be transferred.
yyThe settings data of auto focus type and
manual focus type can be transferred mutually.
However, when the settings data of a manual
focus type are transferred to an auto focus type,
the focusing position will be converted to the
default value.
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC,
the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client
function or a field network enabled cannot be
transferred.
yyWhen the FTP client function or field network
function is enabled, the setting data cannot be
transferred to the sensor during running.
6 If you would also like to transfer the I/O
polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings,

touch the Option button.
7 Confirm the information of the settings file

to be transferred and tap the [Go] button.
After the transmission of the settings data
is completed, the transmission result will be
displayed on the monitor.
When the protocol setting has been changed,
the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.
The Option screen opens.

Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap
the [OK] button.
8 Confirm the transmission result and tap

the [OK] button.

When [Transfer All Settings] has been set to

[Enable], the system returns to the Monitor
Settings screen.
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to

[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
- Color type.................. 70 images
- Monochrome type...... 210 images
yyThe setting of [Transfer All Settings] is reset
to [Disable] after the setting data were
transferred or when the setting is canceled.
yyWhen the PROFINET communication is
being used, the sensor restarts.
6-22

saving to the USB memory
Saves the run screen or settings screen of the
monitor into the USB memory as an image file (BMP).
The saved image files can be imported into the PC
and used as an image for creating reports.
Enabling the screen capturing function
Capturing the screen
1 Enable the screen capture function.
Enabling the screen capturing function

(Page 6-23)
2 Display the screen to be captured and
tap the title area at the upper part of the

screen for about one second.


(Page 6-18)

(Page 6-18)
3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button.
4 Select the [Enable] and tap the [OK] button.
The capture will be executed and the completion

message appears for a few seconds.
yyEach setup screen can be captured by tapping
the title area.
yyFor the full-screen mode, tap the area where the
zooming rate is displayed.
yyWhen the screen which displays the taken
image is captured, the three types of file (screen
capture (bmp), raw image (bmp), image capture
file (ivp)) are saved at the same time.
yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer
to
Folder composition and file naming rules
(Page 6-24).
yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a
pulldown menu are being displayed or during file
processing, screens cannot be captured.

6-23
Folder composition and file naming rules

Data type
Batch backup
Storage
folder
\(Device name of the sensor)_

(Last 24bit of the MAC address)
File name
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1
Extension
iva
Reference
page
Batch saves all the

settings in the sensor.
[Program Only] or
[Prog.+Image Hist.] can be
selected.
6-19
yyScreen capture
(with taken
images)
File name
yyIndividual image
history storage Extension

Simultaneously saves the
(Last 24bit of the MAC address)\ bmp format file for the
IMAGE
taken image and the ivp
format file which can be
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1
used for master image
bmp
registration or Tool Auto
Tuning.
ivp
Storage
yyScreen capture folder
yyIndividual image
history storage
File name
yyWhen the sensor is connected

(Last 24bit of the MAC
Saves an image that the
address)\SCREEN
displayed screen has been
yyWhen the sensor is not
captured as it is including
connected
the title area and the
\IV-M30
buttons.
1
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *
Extension
bmp
Storage
folder

(Last 24bit of the MAC address)
File name
Paa_Tbb_(Tool name) *2
Extension
ivt
Storage
folder
Description
Storage Rule
Tool Auto Tuning
Saves images and criteria

information of Tool Auto
Tuning.
6-20
6-23
6-23
5-28
*1 YYYY: Year; MM: Month; DD: Day; hh: Hour; mm: Minute; ss: Second
For individually saving the batch backup and image history, the file name can be changed to arbitrary
name and saved.
*2 aa: Program number (00 to 31), bb: Tool number (01 to 16), Tool name: The tool name which has been
set will be applied as a tool name if the tool name has been set. The tool type will be applied as a tool
name if the tool name if the tool name has not been set.
yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less.
Files may not be saved correctly.
For the folder with the number of files over 100 files, delete the files and change the folder name.
yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iva files or ivp files) that can be displayed on
the screen to select a file (Page 3-17) is 128.
yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 6-51) are
included in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be save with those characters replaced by
hyphens (-).
6-24

Sensor advanced settings
Setup Adjustment
The section explains the Sensor Advanced screen

displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] in the
Tilt Correction
zz
Performs tilt correction of the images displayed on
the monitor.
Rotate 180
zz
Rotates the display of the monitor 180.
Rotate 180 (Page 6-40)
White Balance (for color type only)

zz
Program
zz
Sets the switching method for programs.
Environmental
Auto Focus Adj Pos

zz
I/O Settings
zz
Sets the input/output settings, specifies the
polarity, and sets the I/O monitor.
I/O Settings (Page 6-26)
Sets whether or not to share the adjusting

position for auto focus to all programs.
Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus
type only) (Page 6-42)
Device Name/Pass
zz
Sets the sensor name and password lock.
Device settings (Page 6-29)
Network Settings
zz
Sets the network settings for the sensor.
Network Settings (Page 6-31)
Adv. Network Settings

zz
Sets the FTP client function and the field
network settings for the sensor.
Advanced Network Settings (Page 6-32)
System
Sensor Information
zz
Displays the information set in the sensor.
Sensor Information (Page 6-43)
Initialize Sensor
zz
Initializes the information set in the sensor.
Initializing the sensor (Page 6-44)
Update Sensor
zz
Upgrades the sensor software.
Updating the sensor (Page 6-44)
6-25
6
Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed

on the monitor.
(Page 6-41)
I/O Settings
Input Settings
Sets the input/output settings for the sensor.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the input settings.
2 Tap the [Environmental] button and then

the [I/O Settings] button.
2 Set the input settings for the sensor.
6
3 Set the input/output settings for the

sensor.
IN1
zz
Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for
IN1 input line.
yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the
external trigger.

Polarity (Page 6-28)
I/O Monitor (Page 6-28)
yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the
external trigger.

button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.
IN2 to IN6
zz
Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.

yyOFF
Ignores the input.
Specifies the number for switching the programs.
(Page 6-8)
yyClear Error
Sets the error output clearance.
yyExt. Master Save
Sets the master image registration from the
external input.
6-26
Option
zz
Common Output Settings

zz
The input option screen opens by tapping the

[Option] button.
The screen to select the output type opens by

tapping the [Common Output Settings] button.
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6)
[Latching]
Outputs the result along with the judgment
condition of the sensor.
6
[One-Shot]
Sets the one-shot time and ON-delay time in
which output the status output with one-shot.
[Close] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of

the sensor.
Output Settings
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the Output Settings.
yyOne-Shot ON Time
Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within
1 to 1000 msec.
yyON-Delay Time
Specifies the ON-delay time of the one-shot
flash within 0 to 5000 msec.
2 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.
For details of settings by the slider or inputting

value, refer to
Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-14).

[Close] button.

the sensor.
OUT1 to OUT4
zz
Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O] or [N.C].
6-27
[Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]

Selecting the [Yes] button writes the data to
the ROM of the sensor when the master image
registration is performed with the external input
or field network.
Registering the Master Image (Page 7-8)
Polarity
I/O Monitor
1 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.
Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly

wired can be confirmed.
1 Tap the [Go] button in the I/O Monitor.
6
yyNPN
Output circuit.....NPN open collector
Input circuit........No-voltage input
yyPNP
Output circuit.....PNP open collector
Input circuit........Voltage input
Cables (Page 2-12)
2 Set the I/O Monitor settings.
Input
zz
Displays the input status of external input in
real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output
from the PLC is being correctly input can be
confirmed.
Output
zz
Tap the [ON] button to turn ON the each OUT
output. Tap the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.
Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is
correctly output.

[Close] button.

the sensor.
6-28
Device settings
Device Name
Sets the sensor name and password lock.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Device Name/Pass] button.
The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled.

When the [Edit] button is tapped, the dialog to enter
a device name opens.
Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.
3 Set the device settings of the sensor.

Device Name (Page 6-29)


button.
6-29
6
yyIf the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,

the device name might be replaced and
yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only a-z,
0-9, -, and .. For the setting details, refer to
IV Series Users Manual (Field Network).
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the
sensor restarts.
Password Lock
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the
incorrect operation.
Correctly use the password lock of the sensor and
the touch screen lock of the monitor (Page 6-50).
6
yyTo enable the password lock, open the run screen.

yyTo disable, input the password when the input
dialog for the password to disable appears.
yyDuring the password lock, editing the Sensor
Setup is locked ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trig]
button on the run screen, threshold adjustment,
image history view (if unable to log in), clearing
the image history, Transfer Program Settings).
yyIf the password lock is temporarily cancelled in
the menu ON screen (Page 5-4), the lock is
cancelled until the system turns to the menu OFF
screen (Page 5-4).
1 Tap the [Settings] button under Security.

2 Select [ON] and tap the [Edit] button.
3 Set a desired password in the password

settings screen.
yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
The password confirmation dialog appears.
5 Enter the password set in step 3 and tap

the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Security screen.
6 Tap the [Close] button.
The password will be changed and the system

returns to the Device Name/Pass screen.
6-30
3 Sets the network address of the sensor.
Network Settings
Sets the network of the sensor.


the [Network Settings] button.
MAC Address
zz
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The
MAC address cannot be changed.
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway

zz
Displays the address for each network.
Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to
edit the address.
Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
For the port number setting, perform it on the
editing screen for the IP address.
[Reset] button
zz
Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address /
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway.
Empty will be displayed after the reset.

button.
yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the

Sensor Advanced screen.
yyIf connected to the network, terminate the
connection to the sensor and reconnect it. If
the reconnection is successful, the Sensor
Setup Menu screen will be displayed. If the
reconnection fails, the Monitor Settings screen
will be displayed.
6-31
6
yyFor details of the monitor's network settings,

refer to
Network Settings (Page 6-48).
yyThe settings are not required for direct connection.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the
network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be
initialized.
The settings can also be initialized using the
IP reset switch (Page A-40) of the sensor.
yyTo set the IP address before connecting to
the network, it can be set by connecting the
monitor and sensor directly.
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the
sensor restarts.
Advanced Network Settings

Sets the FTP client function and the field network
settings for the sensor.
FTP
Automatically transfers the image data and status
result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.
Data transfer via FTP
LAN

the [Adv. Network Settings] button.
FTP client
6
The Adv. Network Settings screen opens.
3 Sets the Advanced Network Settings of

the sensor.
FTP server
yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network

Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. During the direct connection, the setting
item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP
client function, refer to
Remedy when data
transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-38).
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP.
FTP (Page 6-32)

Field Network (Page 6-37)

[Close] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

screen.
6-32
2 Tap the [ON] button in FTP Client.
3 Sets the FTP setting of the sensor.
FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-33)

Transfer Condition Settings (Page 6-34)
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-35)

button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings

screen.
FTP Destination Settings
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP

Destination.
IP Address
zz
Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the IP Address
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
yyThe port number setting can be done on the
edit screen of IP Address.
yyDefault port number : 21
User Name
zz
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the User Name
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
to
Password
zz
Input the password for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Password
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary password and tap the [OK]
button.
The FTP Destination screen opens.

to
Passive Mode
zz
To use the passive mode, tap the [Enable] button.
6-33
6
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to

[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
yyColor type................. 70 images
yyMonochrome type..... 210 images
2 Set the network address of the FTP server.
3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to
test the connection with the connection

destination.
The connection test is performed and the result

window opens.
Transfer Condition Settings
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer

Condition.
The Transfer Condition screen opens.
2 Set the file transfer conditions.
If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the

setting is completed.
When the test is executed, the connection with
the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer
destination, and data file creating are tested.
When the connection cannot be done properly,
deal with the problem in accordance with the
cause of connect failure displayed on the
result window.
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable (Page A-38)
The system returns to the FTP Destination

screen.

button.
The system returns to the main screen of the

FTP Settings.
6-34
Transfer Condition
zz
Selects the transfer condition of image data.
yyAll......................Transfers all the images that
are judged.
yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose
total status results are NG.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
adjust the processing time so that all the
images can be transferred.
yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, the data are saved in the internal
buffer. The internal buffer can save images
up to 30 images.
yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that
they have been saved to the internal buffer.
yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal
buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and
the image data transfer fails.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
confirm that there is sufficient storage area
on the FTP server.
File Format
zz
Selects the file saving format for image data.

yyIVP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation
results can be confirmed in the simulator
function by using the transferred image data.
Moreover, the image data can be converted to
the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter.
yyBMP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by other applications.
Transfer Destination Folder Settings
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer

Destination Folder.
Transfer Judgment Results

zz
The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens.
2 Specify the transfer destination folder of

FTP server.
The example for displaying the saved results

file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.
Folder
zz
FTP Error
zz
To turn ON the error output function for when a

file transfer failed, select [Enable].
When this item is set to [Enable], the
followings occur if a file transfer fails.
yyThe following error messages are displayed
in response to the causes of failure.
- FTP Connection Error
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyIf FTP Transfer Error has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition will
continue until the error is cleared.

button.

FTP Settings.
Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server.

Set an arbitrary folder name.
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to
be transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with / (onebyte slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new
folder will be created.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Folder
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary folder name and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (blank). Up to 16 characters
can be set.
to
yy/ (one-byte slash), . (one-byte point) and
(one-byte space) cannot be used as the
first nor last letter of the folder name.
yy/ (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple
times in a row.
6-35
6
To transfer judgement results simultaneously

with the image data, select [Enable].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab
delimited text.
File Name
zz
Create Subfolder
zz
Sets the file name of the transfer files.

When the [Edit] button is tapped, the File Name
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary file name and tap the [OK] button.
6
yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters

can be set.
to
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.
xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD
yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been
set (up to 16 characters)
yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each
FTP transfer (5 digits which
zero suppression is not used).
Promptly after startup, 00000
is displayed.
yyBB.............The program number (2 digits
which zero suppression is not
used)
yyCC.............The total status result
(OK or NG)
yyDDD..........The extension (ivp or bmp)
yyIf there is a file with the same name at
the transfer destination, that file will be
overwritten. When you transfer image data
from multiple IV series, specify different
transfer destinations so that the image data
are not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only
or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the
image data transfer will fail.
Index Upper Limit

zz
Sets the upper limit of the number of image
data which can be transferred to the transfer
destination folder.
To create subfolders under the transfer

destination folder, select [ON].
yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.
IVxxxxx
(xxxxx is a sequence number created
every time the sensor is restarted or the
FTP settings are changed.)
yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder
structure is as follows.
Root folder
Transfer destination folder
Subfolder
0000
0001
0002
When the file index quantity reaches the index
upper limit, the folder of the next sequence
number is created.
yyThe default of subfolders is IV00001.

yyThe upper limit is IV99999. When the upper
limit has been reached, the count continues
by returning to IV00000.
yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders
in the subfolder is 9999. When the number
is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.

button.

FTP Settings.
When the file index quantity has reached the

index upper limit, as follows.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON],
the folder of the next sequence number is
created.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF],
the file index quantity returns to 0.
6-36
Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
communication data.
For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.
Host device such as PLC

(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)
6
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter
yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor.
During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.
IV Series Users Manual (Field Network).
yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Field

Network.
2 Select the protocol.
3 To enable the handshake control, select

[Enable].
When the protocol is set as [Disable], this

setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.

button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings

screen.
6-37
Sensor
Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor
and target and/or to prevent a shine on the targets surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally
distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.
Vertical correction
Horizontal correction
Indicator light
Top view
Top view
Target
Target
Indicator light
Target
Target
Lateral view
Before tilt correction
6-38
Lateral view

(vertical)
Before tilt correction

(horizontal)

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button and

then the [Tilt Correction] button.
Vertical
zz
Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
of the vertical direction of the taken image.
Before correction
After correction
Before correction
<Image of vertical correction>
Horizontal
zz
Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
of the horizontal direction of the taken image.
The information screen opens.
piece of paper printed with square grids.
Before correction
After correction
Before correction
<Image of horizontal correction>
5 Perform the tilt correction.
yyIf the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be made.
Lighting (Page 4-18)
yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging
area after tilt correction. The imaging area
after the tilt correction may have become
narrower than before the correction by the tilt
correction.

button.
OFF
zz
Tilt correction is not performed.
After performing a tilt correction, a message

prompting you to re-register the master image
appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.
6-39

4 Image a target to be a reference such as a
3 Image a desired target.
Rotate 180
The image of a target may be rotated 180 and
displayed due to the installation restrictions of the
sensor and target. The rotate 180 function rotates
the image displayed on the monitor 180.
Indicator light
6
If the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yy Lighting (Page 4-18)
4 Tap the [ON] button.
The display of the monitor will be displayed with

the image rotated 180.
Target
Before rotate 180

correction
After rotate 180

correction

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and

then the [Rotate 180] button.

yyAfter performing a rotate 180 correction, a
message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
button is tapped.
2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)
yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-38) has also been
performed, confirm the tilt correction settings
after a rotate 180 correction.
6-40

Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in
camera of the sensor.
4 Image a white-colored target and tap the

[Go] button.
The white balance is adjusted by default.

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and

then the [White Balance] button.
After the white balance adjustment is completed,

the message "White balance complete." appears.
The system returns to the White Balance screen.
The White Balance screen opens.
3 Tap the [Execute] button.
After performing a white balance adjustment,

a message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
button is tapped.
To initialize the white balance which has been

set, tap the [Initialize] button and tap the [OK]
button on the confirmation dialog.
If the taken image displayed on the monitor is
not suitable for adjusting the white balance,
tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust
the taken image. Also, if the white balance
has been set to [Enable], the image will be
displayed with the white balance adjustment
applied.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yy Lighting (Page 4-18)
6-41

(auto focus type only)
Sets the method for switching the program number.

(Page 6-8)
Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position

for the auto focus common to all programs.
2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the
2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the [Auto
3 Set a program switch method.
3 Set an auto focus adjustment position.
[Program Switch Method] button.

Focus Adj Pos] button.
6
yyMonitor/PC.........The program number is

switched by the monitor or IVNavigator (IV-H1) operation.
yyExternal IN........The program number is
switched by the external input.
To use the [External IN], any of the program
bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2
to IN6 in the input settings.

button.
6-42
Common
zz
Sets the focus adjustment position common to
all programs. Select this when the focus position
of the target registered in each program is
common. The program can be quickly switched
because re-adjustment of the focusing position
will not be performed when the program number
is switched.
Individual
zz
Sets the focus adjustment position in each
program. Select this when the focus position
is different for each target registered in each
program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when
the program number is switched. Switching
programs takes longer in this option due to the
time needed to adjust the focusing position.
The duration for the operation count of the

focusing function (program switch count)
is 100,000 times. If the focusing position
does not need to be changed for each
program, set the Auto Focus Adj Pos to
Common to extend its duration.
Sensor Information
Displays the information set in the sensor.
The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
IP address, and device name can be confirmed.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
button.
[Sensor Information] button.
When the auto focus adjustment position is set

to [Common], a message recommending reregistration of the master image appears.
button is tapped.
The information set in the sensor will be displayed.
The monitor information (Page 6-53) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Monitor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.
6-43
Initializing the sensor

Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets
For details of procedures, refer to
Initializing the
sensor (Page 3-12).
yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28)
yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-31)
yyUse the "Initialize monitor" function to initialize
the information set in the monitor.
Initializing the monitor (Page 3-13)
6
Updating the sensor

Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
6-44

Monitor Settings
Monitor Environment
The section explains the monitor settings displayed

by tapping the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to
ON.
Language
zz
Selects the language to be displayed on the
monitor.
Language (Page 6-51)
Time
zz
Confirms or changes the time set in the monitor.
Time (Page 6-51)
Backlight
zz
Sets the backlight of the monitor.
Backlight (Page 6-52)
Adjusts the position to be touched of the

monitor.
Touch Panel Calibration (Page 6-52)
System
Monitor Information
zz
Displays the information set in the monitor.
Monitor Information (Page 6-53)
Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the
sensor.
Sensor Connect (Page 6-46)
Initialize Monitor
zz
Initializes the information set in the monitor.
Initialize Monitor (Page 6-53)
Update Monitor
zz
Updates the software version of the monitor.
Displaying the Sensor Image History
screen (Page 6-14)
Monitor Device Settings

Network Settings
zz
Performs the network settings of the monitor.
Display Settings
zz
Performs the settings for the screens and
buttons to be displayed on the monitor.
Display Settings (Page 6-49)
Touch Screen Lock

zz
Sets to prevent the incorrect operation of the
monitor.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-50)
6-45
Touch Panel Calibration

zz
Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor.
The setting method differs whether the monitor and
sensor are directly connected or connected via network.
When directly connecting with the sensor
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.
yyIf the connection cannot be established, refer

to
Remedy when direct connection is
unavailable (Page A-28).
yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
automatically set.
yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor
when the PROFINET function is being used,
the PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.
When connecting with the sensor via a

network

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.
yyIf the monitor and sensor are connected directly,

the [Direct Connection] will be displayed.
yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only if an
IP address is displayed (network connected).
3 Tap the [Direct Connection] button and

When the monitor and the sensor are connected

via network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.
3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and


After the restart, the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen opens.
6-46

yyIf the FTP client function is to be set to [ON],
select [Network Connection].
yyIf the field network is to be set to [EtherNet/IP]
or [PROFINET], select [Network Connection].

After the restart, the sensor connection setup
screen opens.
Searching for and connecting to sensors on

zz
the network
Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
yyBOOTP is used for assigning the IP address

to the sensor.
Settings after initialization (Page A-40)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of
units are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved
within a range that the BOOTP packet from
the sensor reaches (Page A-40).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
the local network to which the monitor is
connected.
The searched result will be displayed.

Select the sensor to be connected using the [<]
or the [>] button and tap the [Connect] button.
After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor

When a sensor without a set IP address is
selected and the [Connect] button is tapped,
the confirmation dialog appears.
The information dialog appears when the [OK]
button is tapped. The screen to set the sensor
network settings opens when the [OK] button
is tapped.
Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the
subnet mask, and the default gateway, and
then tap the [Connect] button.
6-47
Specifying the IP address of and

zz
connecting to the sensor
Network Settings
Performs the settings of the network address of the
monitor.
Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

and then the [Network Settings] button.
6
The screen to input the IP address of the sensor

to be connected opens.
Input the IP address of the sensor to be
connected and tap the [Connect] button.
3 Set the network address for the monitor.
yyWhen the [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP

address is input, you can confirm whether or
not a sensor with the specified IP address
exists on the network.
yyTo set a port number, set it using the [PORT]
button.
After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor
If the connection cannot be established, refer
to
Remedy when connection via a network
is unavailable (Page A-29).
MAC Address
zz
Displays the MAC address for the monitor. The
MAC address cannot be changed.
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway

zz
Tapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to
edit the address.
Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.

button.
The message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.

After the restart, the run screen opens.
6-48
Display Settings
Sets the display method of the screens or messages
to be displayed on the monitor.

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

and then the [Display Settings] button.
6
3 Set the individual display item.
Manual Trigger
zz
Sets to enable/disable the [Trig] button in the

run screen when the Trigger Options are set to
[External].
Names and Functions of the Operation
Screen (Page 5-4)
The [Trig] button displayed in the settings
screen cannot be set to hidden.
Update Image in RUN Mode

zz
Sets the display to ON/OFF for the taken image

to be displayed on the monitor. Usually the setting
is set to ON.
Tool Auto Tuning Guide

zz
Sets the Tool Auto Tuning Guide to show/hide.

The display automatically turns OFF by tapping the
[Hide Next] button in the Tool Auto Tuning Guide.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

6-49
6 Enter the password set in step 4 and tap
Touch Screen Lock

Sets the password on the monitor to prevent
misoperation of the touch panel.
yyTo enable the touch screen lock, turn the screen to
the menu OFF screen on the run screen (Page 5-4).
yyTo disable it, tap the [Menu] button and input the
password.
yyDuring the touch screen lock, operations other
than the tool selection and image capture are
locked.

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button
and then the [Touch Screen Lock] button.
the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock

screen.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings

screen.
For efficiently using the touch screen lock and

password lock (Page 6-30),
yyThe touch screen lock function locks the touch
screen operation of the monitor to prevent
misoperations of the monitor and the sensor
connected to the monitor.
yyThe password lock function locks the sensor
settings. It does not lock the operations and
settings of the monitor.
yyTo lock editing the sensor settings with multiple
monitors or the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), use the
password lock function. It cannot protect from
the misoperations by the monitor or IV-Navigator
(IV-H1) that the touch screen lock is not applied.
3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.
4 Set the arbitrary password in the

password settings screen.

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to
The password confirmation dialog appears.
6-50
Language
Time
Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and

then the [Language] button.
Sets the date and time of the monitor.

yyThis setting is adjusted by default.
yyThe date and time information are used for
saving files into the USB memory.

is set to ON.

then the [Time] button.
3 Select the button of the language to be
displayed on the monitor and tap the [OK]

button.
3 Set the date and time of the monitor.
The information screen opens.

After the restart, the display language will be
switched to the selected language and the run
screen opens.
Regarding the display of the characters in device

names (Page 6-29) and program names (Page 6-12)
yyCharacters which cannot be display with
the language after change are replaced and
yyIf the device or program name has not been changed
after you changed a language, those name can be
displayed as they were in the previous language once
you change back a language into the previous one.
yyIf the device or program name has been changed
after the language change, it will remain replaced
by hyphens (-) and the former information will be
erased when the language is changed back.
yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the

[] or [] button and enter the numbers.
the selected item.

button.
6-51
Backlight
Sets the backlight of the monitor.
Adjusts the position to be touched of the touch panel.
The monitor recovers from dim mode when the

touch panel is operated or when an error occurs

is set to ON.
then the [Backlight] button.
3 Set the backlight of the monitor.
This setting is adjusted by default.

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Enviroment] button and tap

the [Touch Panel Calibration] button.
The screen switches to the screen to adjust the

position to be tapped.
4 Follow the message displayed on the
monitor and tap the center of the cross

mark ( ) in order.
Backlight Brightness
zz
Adjusts the brightness of the backlight.

The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7
(default : 5).
Auto Off
zz
Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off

function.
Auto Off Time Delay

zz
This is available when the [Enable] is selected for

the Auto Off function. Sets the time delay of the
monitor to be dimmed. Also, after 30 minutes since
the monitor being dimmed, the monitor turns off.
Options: 30 sec/1 min/5 min/10 min/30 min
After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped

is completed, the message "Touch panel calibration
completed. Touch the screen to exit." appears.
5 Tap the monitor.

button.

6-52
Monitor Information
Initialize Monitor
Displays the information set in the monitor.

Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC
address, and IP address.

is set to ON.

[Monitor Information] button.
Initializes the information set in the monitor and set

For details of procedures, refer to
Initializing the
monitor (Page 3-13).
yyLanguage (Page 6-51)
yyTime (Page 6-51)
yyUse the "Initialize Sensor" function to initialize
the information set in the sensor.
Initializing the sensor (Page 3-12)
The information set in the monitor will be

displayed.
Updates the operation software of the monitor.

For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
The sensor information (Page 6-43) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings

screen.
6-53
Update Monitor
MEMO
6
6-54
7
Controlling with
Input/Output Line
This chapter explains how the input / output

terminal controls each operation.
7-1
7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with

Triggers...............................................................7-2
Importing the Status Output..............................7-4
Changing Over....................................................7-7
Registering the Master Image...........................7-8
Clearing Errors.................................................7-10
Operations when Power of
the Sensor is Turned on...................................7-11
Input Response Time.......................................7-12
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

For details of the trigger, refer to
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8).
External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of
inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
Min
100 s
External trigger input
ON
OFF
Trigger 3
Trigger 4
Min 1.2 ms
(5)
(1)
Processing time
BUSY output
ON
OFF
Judgment process
(internal)
7
Total status output

Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Output of each logic
Trigger error output
(2)
Max 2 ms
(3)
Trigger delay
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Previous result
Result from Trigger 1
(4)
Max 2 ms
ON
OFF
(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 s for ON, and 1.2 ms for
OFF.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is
performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.]
: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-28) is NPN, and
indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6).
7-2
Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set
trigger interval.
Internal trigger
Trigger 1
(1)
Trigger 2
Trigger interval
Trigger interval
Processing time
BUSY output
ON
OFF
Trigger 4
Trigger interval
Trigger 5
Trigger interval
(5)
(2)
(3)
Judgment process
(internal)
Total status output
Trigger 3
Min 0.2 ms
ON
OFF
Previous result
(4)
ON
OFF
(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs
depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.
Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to
1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [OFF] and
ignore the trigger error.
7-3
(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.
Importing the Status Output

Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line,
refer to
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60).
Importing the total status / total status NG output

Total status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be
checked.
External trigger/Internal
trigger
Trigger 1
Processing time
White line: OUT 2

Assign the BUSY output
Black line: OUT 1
Assign the total status/
total status NG output
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
ON
OFF
Previous total status result
Total status result of Trigger 1
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to
yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK.
The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position
adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.
7-4
Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input
Trigger 1
Processing time
Black line: OUT 1

Assign the BUSY output
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
ON
White line: OUT 2

Assign "Tool 1"
OFF
Gray line: OUT 3

Assign "Tool 2"
OFF
Orange line: OUT 4

Assign "Logic 1"
OFF
ON
ON
Previous result
Status result of Tool 1
Previous result
Status result of Tool 2
Previous result
Status result of Logic 1
7-5
7
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result
was NG or --.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.
Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot]
which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to
Output Settings (Page 6-27).
trigger
BUSY output
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Status output
(Latching output)
Status output
(One-Shot output)
ON
OFF
ON
Status result of Trigger 1
Previous status result
OFF
Delay time

One-Shot ON Time
Delay time
One-Shot ON Time
yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns
OFF before each process is completed.
Cancelling One-Shot output

To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time
If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is
cancelled and is not output.
Trigger 1
trigger
BUSY output
(1)
ON
OFF
ON
Internal process of Trigger

1
OFF
Internal process of Trigger

2
OFF
Judgment process
Trigger 2
Trigger input interval
(2)
Delay time
ON
One-Shot ON Time
(3)
Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)
Delay time
ON
OFF
Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)
One-Shot ON Time

Delay time
One-Shot ON Time
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output
is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.
(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1
is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by
a fluctuating BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time
7-6
Changing Over
Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the
input line. For details of program functions, refer to
Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions) (Page
6-8).
trigger
Program bit0 to bit4
Input
Trigger 1
ON
OFF
(1)
Min 10 ms
(5)
PROG00
PROG01
Switching time
(4)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PROG00
PROG01
PROG02
Min 0 ms
Previous result
(3)
ON
OFF
(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched.
Minimum input time is 10 ms.
When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method (Page 6-11)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels
the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the
canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.
(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60)
under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the
switching program is completed.
Input Response Time (Page 7-12).
yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to
yyUse this function during an operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the
program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching
programs and external master registration process will vary.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the monitor might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY
output OFF).
7-7
PROG02
Switching time (T1)
T2
Total status output

Trigger 3
(2)
BUSY output
Program number
Trigger 2
Registering the Master Image

The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details
on master image registration, refer to
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for
Judgment) (Page 4-20).
trigger
(1) Trigger 1
(7) Trigger 2
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
External master registration

input
ON
(2)
OFF
Master image registration time (T3)
BUSY output
Judgment process
(internal)
Master image (internal)
7
Total status output

Error output
ON
(3)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T4
Image of Trigger 1
(5)
Previous master image
Image of Trigger 1
(4)
Previous result
ON
(6) In case of failure
OFF
(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF
input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs
depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image
registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master
image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated
from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image
registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.
(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new
master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.
7-8

yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to
yyUse this function during an operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during
setup.
yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when
the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in
the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
y
y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the
system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled,
the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration
process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed.
The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.
ROM writing
settings
Master image is registered externally

when power is turned OFF
Number of times that external

master image registration can
perform (duration)
Yes
The master image is not deleted.

The image can be used as a master image after
starting up the device next time.
100,000 times
No
The master image is deleted.

External master image registration needs to be
performed after starting up the device.
No limit
yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is
in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode
before the power is turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3).
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.
7-9
7
yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the
internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to
Input Settings (Page 6-26).
Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing has occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred
(Min 2 ms)
Clear Error input
ON
Min 2 ms
(2)
OFF
T5
Error output
ON
(1)
OFF
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

Error types which can be output are as follows.
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings
Navigator to [ON].
yyFTP error
To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-32) to [Enable].
(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
Errors which can be cleared are as follows.
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
yyFTP error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
yyFor details on T5, refer to
7-10
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when
starting operation.
Initializing
2 seconds or longer
Power (DC24V)
BUSY
20 ms or longer
RUN
OFF
Determine the
I/O settings
(2)
(3)
ON
Trigger
(4)
OFF
(5)
ON
OFF
(6)
ON
OFF
Total status output

Status output of each tool ON
OFF
Min 0 ms
Min
0.2 ms
Min
0.2 ms
(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
Operation for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11)
Polarity (Page 6-28)
(2) The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 6-42) is set to
[External IN], the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line.
(3) BUSY output function turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.
yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output
assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs
are not being assigned, it will not be output.
7-11
RUN output
System error
(1)
Trigger
Error output
RUN
ON
Program number
BUSY output
Setting
Input Response Time
Input Response Time
The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending
on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing
from the affect of different response times.
Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the error clear input
T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Description for symbols

Symbols
Description
Time
Judgment process
cancelling time *
400 (800) [ms] (typ.)

Added when it is input during the judgment process.
Tool registration time *
Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following

each tool
Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Outline
: 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Color area
: 100 [ms] (typ.)
Area
: 100 [ms] (typ.)
Auto focus position

adjustment time
860 [ms] (typ.)

Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto
Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is set to [Individual].
Nonvolatile memory
saving time
3,500 [ms] (typ.)

Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]
(Page 6-27) is set to [Yes].
Trigger delay time
Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1,000) [ms]

Added only when the [External] (Page 4-10) is selected for trigger
type.
* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().
7-12
8
Specifications
This chapter explains the specifications and

dimensions of the sensor and monitor.
Specifications.....................................................8-2
Dimensions.........................................................8-6
8
Specifications
8-1
Specifications
Specifications
Sensor
Model
IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Standard range
Installed distance
50 to 500mm
Image sensor
1/3 inch
color CMOS
Exposure time
Amplifier type
Light
Specifications
Tool
Lighting
method
Type
Number*2
Switch settings
(programs)
Image
history*3
Manual
1/10 to 1/50,000
Auto*1
1/10 to 1/25,000
White LED
Manual
Auto*1
1/20 to 1/25,000
Red LED
Manual
Auto*1
1/10 to 1/25,000
Infrared LED
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable

Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment
Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
32 programs
Condition
NG only/All is selectable
Indicators
300 images*5
OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable
Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors,
judge results list by tools
Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
HDR, HighGain, Color filters*7, Digital zoom*8, Brightness correction,
Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run,
ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9
PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON
current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input
: Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Input
Inputs
Function
8-2
Auto*1
100 images*4
Other functions
300 to 2000mm
752 (H) x 480 (V)

Manual
Numbers
Analysis information*6
50 to 150mm
1/3 inch
monochrome CMOS
Pixel
Focus adjustment
Long range
Installed distance Installed distance

50mm :
300mm :
12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm
to
to
Installed distance
Installed distance
150mm :
2000mm :
36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm
Installed distance 50 mm :
25 (H) x 18 (V) mm
to
Installed distance 500mm :
210 (H) x 157 (V) mm
View
Short range
6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)

IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions :

Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration
Specifications
Model
IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA
Output
Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable

For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 2V or lower
Ethernet*10
Outputs
4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)
Function
Enable by assigning the optional functions

Assignable functions :
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result,
Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool
Standard
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Connector M12 4pin connector
Network function
Rating
Power
voltage
FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET

DC 24V 10% (including ripple)
Consumption
0.6A or less
current
Environmental
resistance
Relative
humidity
35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
Vibration
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
Specifications
Ambient
0 to +50C (No freezing)
temperature
Shock
500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance
Enclosure
IP67
rating*11
Material
Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic,
Mounting adapter : POM
Weight
Approx. 270 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the
operation.
The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Tools can be installed by programs.
*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent
monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1).
*4 70 images when using the FTP client function
*5 210 images when using the FTP client function
*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1).
*7 Color type only.
*8 Monochrome type only.
*9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1).
*10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1).
*11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.
8-3
Specifications
Intelligent Monitor
Model
IV-M30
Display
Backlight
Touch panel
3.5" TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dot (QVGA)
Method
White LED
Duration
Approx. 50,000 hours (25 C)
Method
Analog resistive
Actuating force
0.8N or lower
Indicators
Ethernet*1
PWR, SENSOR
Standard
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Connector
M12 4pin connector

Japanese / English / Deutsch / Chinese (Simplified) /
Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese /
Korean
Languages
USB memory*2
Expanded memory
Rating
Specifications
Environmental
resistance
*1
*2
*3
8-4
Power voltage
DC 24V 10% (including ripple)
Consumption
current
0.2A or lower
Ambient
temperature
0 to +50C (No freezing)
Relative humidity*3
35 to 80%RH (No condensation)
Vibration
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y,

and Z axes
Drop impact
resistance
1.3m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)
Enclosure rating
IP40
Material
Polycarbonate
Weight
Approx. 180g
This is dedicated for connection with IV Series sensor.

Use the KEYENCE recommended product.
If the ambient temperature is over 40C, use it in the absolute humidity of 40C 80% RH or lower.
Specifications
MEMO
8
Specifications
8-5
Dimensions
Dimensions
Sensor
yyIV-500C
yyIV-500CA
yyIV-150M
yyIV-150MA
yyIV-500M
yyIV-500MA
yyIV-2000M
yyIV-2000MA
(102)
R5
52
50
Focusing position
adjustment screw
(MF type only)
50
0.4
41
10.5
50
10.5
32.4
57.4
Specifications
10.5
81.5
Mounting
adapter
56
58
20
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
WD reference surface
8-6
45.5
25
4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
3-M3
(Depth 6mm)
20.5
(108)
Dimensions
34.6
134
yyWith dome attachment

Installed distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment
Compatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type
62
Distance from WD reference surface
yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32
Specifications
56
5
Distance from WD reference surface
Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
134
90.4
8-7
Dimensions
Polarizing filter attachment
Power I/O cable
yyOP-87436
yyOP-87440
(2m)
yyOP-87437
32
yyOP-87441
(5m)
yyOP-87442
(10m)
2000
5000
10000
6.7
15
56
45
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460
8
Specifications
4-3.2
6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
20
56
57
4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
17
25
Front cover
yyOP-87461
0.4
50
27.1
8-8
120
5
150 5
180
Dimensions
Bracket
yyOP-87685
112.5
56
19.6
31.6
93
48.4
50
0.4
99
58
Specifications
82.5
41
(99)
8-9
Dimensions
Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30
102.3
70.56
(Display area)
(2.2)
(13)
1.4
52.12
(Display area)
84
(52)
USB port
26.4
(Excluding the
convexed surface)
R20
(109)
Specifications
R50
yyUsing the wall mounting adapter

6
8
2.74
98.7
40
20.2
2-3.5
30.3
Mounting hole dimension

40
8-10
2-M3
Dimensions
yyUsing the panel mounting adapter

119
110
4 22.8
110
92 +1
0
110.5
109 100 91.5
4-3.5
100
111 +1
0
Panel thickness
1 to 4mm
(40)
Panel cutting dimensions
4-M3
Screw depth 4.2
(97)
yyUsing the DIN mounting adapter
Specifications
107
35.9
57.1
33.8
8-11
Dimensions
Optional parts for the monitor

Monitor power cable
yyOP-87444
(5m)
yyOP-87445
(10m)
yyOP-87464
4.5
9.5
3.7
yyOP-87443
(2m)
Wall mounting adapter
26.7
96.9
2000
5000
10000
Protection sheet
48
yyOP-87463
8.5
Panel mounting adapter
73.9
69.9
yyOP-87465
8
Specifications
50.4
109
t = 0.16
Stylus
119
yyOP-87462
7.6
94.7
5.6
DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466
81.3
9.9
107
8-12
30.7
18.5
Dimensions
Connection Cable
Monitor cable
Ethernet cable
yyOP-87451 (5m)
yyOP-87453 (20m)
yyOP-87458
(5m)
yyOP-87459
(10m)
2000
5000
10000
20000
14.6
14.8
6.4
14.8
47.3
yyOP-87457
(2m)
6.4
yyOP-87450 (2m)
yyOP-87452 (10m)
47.3
2000
5000
10000
59
47.3
8
Specifications
8-13
Dimensions
MEMO
8
Specifications
8-14
Appendices
Status Table.......................................................A-2
Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5
Settings List.......................................................A-6
Troubleshooting..............................................A-19
Error Messages...............................................A-22
Connected with the Sensor............................ A-28
(IP Reset Switch).............................................A-40
Maintenance.....................................................A-41
Index.................................................................A-42
A-1
Status Table
Status Table
Status table
Monitor
screen
type
Status
Sensor operation indicator light

PWR/ERR
Waiting for a trigger

Running *2
Judgment processing
RUN
Switching programs
Lighting
(green)
TEST
Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc.

Focus adjustment (MF)
Setting
Automatically adjusting the brightness

Automatically adjusting the focus (AF)
LIVE
Trigger error
Error
*5
OFF
Blink
(green)
OFF
*5
OFF
*14
OFF
Blink
(green)
OFF
*15
OFF
Others
OFF
*13
Setup Adjustment
I/O Monitor
*3
TRIG
*9
Registering the external master image

Limit Adjustment
OUT
Running
RUN
Setting
LIVE
Blink (red)
Lighting
(red)
Same as normal
External master registration error

System error
Startup memory readout error
OFF
OFF
/ indicates enable/disable of the input.

ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.

When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.

When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.

The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

Total Status Conditions (Page 4-65)

When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Monitor Settings/Sensor Image
History/USB Memory] screen in the run screen.
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.
OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal).

When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2
Status Table
Input
External
trigger
*6
Output
External
Switch
master image
programs
registration
*7
*8
*10
*11
*11
*10
Clear
Error
Total Status / Total status NG /

Each tool / Each logic /
Pos.Adj. *1
OFF
BUSY
Error
ON
OFF
*4
ON
*12
Same
as while
running
OFF
OFF
OFF
*13
RUN
OFF
*16
OFF
OFF
OFF
Same as normal
Same as normal
OFF
OFF
*17
*17
ON
OFF
*17
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.

*7 Stops the judgment process and switches over.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previously taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result
will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator
light operates in the same way.
*15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned
functions will not operate.
*17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the
polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.
Additionally, refer to
Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 7-1).
A-3
Status Table

Status
Display
Total Status
NG
Total Status *2
Judgment of each tool

Output
Display
Output
Output
---
OFF
--
OFF
OFF
OK
0 to 100
ON
Judge is NG
NG
0 to 100
OFF
Unable to judge *6
--
---
OFF
Judgment
Matching rate *1
Waiting for a trigger

(Not judged) *3
--
Judge is OK
*4
*5
*6
OFF
ON
*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has
changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode.
*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be
determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to
Displaying and
outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment (Page A-4).
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Position
Window
adjustment
protrusion *1
result
No
Succeeded
Yes
Failed
Display/output
Judgment of each tool
Total Total Status

Color Area/ Status *2
NG
Area
Pos. Adj.
Outline
View judgment
OK
OK/NG
OK/NG
Status output
ON
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
View matching rate
0 to 100
0 to 100
View judgment
OK
OK/NG
-- *6
Status output
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
0 to 100
*7
0 to 100
---
*3
*4
*5
*3
*4
*6
View matching rate
0 to 100
View judgment
NG
--
--
NG
Status output
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
View matching rate
0 to 100
---
---
ON
*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area
(Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed.
*6 For details of the targets outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to
Matching rate
at the time of protrusion (Page A-5)
*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the
imaging area.
A-4
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Position Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of protrusion
When the search region is Entire
zz
When the target outline protrudes from the
imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded
from the target for calculating the matching rate.
The matching rate decreases in proportion to
the protrusion amount.
Tool window
Protruding outline
(excluded from the target for
calculating the matching rate)
Cut-off process of the matching rate

The cut-off process means the process where the
outline detection process is ended when no outline
exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value)
below the threshold value is found.
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes
0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the
threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when
the threshold is changed.
(Cut-off value)
Threshold
Matching
rate
Outline to be targeted
for calculating the
matching rate
Cut-off processing range

(Range where the matching rate
becomes 0)
Current
matching rate
Imaging area
When the search region is Partial

zz
The sensor searches the outline of the target that

is in the search region. The matching rate of the
target being out of search region will be 0.
If the target is being protruded from the imaging
area, the matching rate will decrease depends
on how much the target is protruded from the
imaging area.
The above behavior is the case that the version

of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
For the version R1.00, the matching rate
decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.
When the tool window after position adjustment

protrudes from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes -(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.
A-5
Settings List
Settings List
RUN screen (menu display OFF)
Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
(Tool name)
A tool to be selected on the Number of tools set in the

monitor can be switched. program
5-4
Menu
Displays the menu.
5-4
Setting range
Reference
page
Number of tools set in the

program
5-4
RUN screen (menu display ON)

Menu
Description
(Tool name)
A tool to be selected
on the monitor can be
switched.
OFF
Hides menus.
5-4
Monitor Settings
The Monitor Settings

screen opens.
6-45
Displays the Sensor

Image History screen.
6-14
Displays the image

history in the sensor.
6-14
Batch Backup
Backs up the image

6-19
View
Displays the selected image

in full-screen in the monitor.
5-6
Save to USB Memory
Saves the displayed image

to the USB memory.
6-20
Auto Tuning
Performs the Tool Auto

Tuning based on the
displayed image.
View
5-20
Clear
Deletes the image history

in the sensor.
6-16
Logging Settings
Settings cannot be
changed during running.
6-17
Displays the USB

Memory screen.
6-18
USB Memory
A-6
yyAutoTune as OK
yyAutoTune as NG
Batch Backup
Backs up the sensor

settings and image
history into the USB
memory.
Transfer Program Settings
Transfers the settings

backed up into the USB
memory to the sensor.
Screen Capture Settings
Saves the image displayed

on the monitor into the
yyON (default value)
USB memory as an image yyOFF
data (bmp).
yyProgram Only
yyProg.+Image Hist.
(default value)
-
6-19
6-21
6-23
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Sensor Setup
Displays the Sensor

Setup Menu screen.
6-7
Trig
Displays when the

external trigger is set.
4-7
Zoom
Sets the monitor to fullscreen mode. Zooming

in/out can be performed.
yy1.0x (default value)

yy1.5x
yy2.0x
yy3.0x
5-6
Tool View
Changes the display

method of the tool.
yyOFF
yyWindow
yyProcess 1 (default
value)
yyProcess 2
5-7
Analysis
Displays the analysis

information (statistics/
histogram).
yyOFF (default value)

yyStatistics
yyHistogram
5-10
5-12
View
Sensor Setup Menu screen

Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Program
Switches the programs to

PROG_00 to PROG_31
be set.
6-8
Detail
Displays the sensor

program detail screen
6-12
6-13
(Master image)
Displays the master

image of the currently
selected program.
(Program information)
Displays an information
of selected program.
PROG_00 to PROG_31
Up to 16 characters
(English and Japanese
single byte characters)
6-7
6-12
6-13
Edit
Edits a program name.
Copy
Copies the selected

program to unregistered
program.
6-12
Initialize
Initializes the program

settings.
6-13
Sensor Setup
Displays the Settings

Navigator screen.
4-1
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the threshold of

selected tool.
Tool Auto Tuning
Displays the screen for

the Tool Auto Tuning.
5-15
Sensor Advanced
Displays the sensor

advanced screen.
6-25
0 to 100
6-12
5-14
A-7
Settings List
Setting range
Reference
page
Displays the Sensor

Image History screen.
6-14
Displays the image

6-14
Batch Backup
Backs up the image

6-19
View
Displays the selected image

in full-screen in the monitor.
5-6
Save to USB Memory
Saves the displayed image

to the USB memory.
6-20
Auto Tuning
Performs the Tool Auto

Tuning based on the
displayed image.
Menu
Description

View
Deletes the image history

in the sensor.
Image History Settings
Sets the condition of an image yyAll

to log as an image history.
yyNG only (default value)
6-17
Displays the USB

Memory screen.
6-18
6-16
Batch Backup
Backs up the sensor

yyProgram Only
settings and image history yyProg.+Image Hist.
(default value)
into the USB memory.
6-19
Transfer Program Settings
Transfers the settings

backed up into the USB
memory to the sensor.
6-21
Option (Transfer All Settings)
Screen Capture Settings

RUN
A-8
5-20
Clear
USB Memory
yyAutoTune as OK
yyAutoTune as NG
Transfers the I/O polarity,

yyEnable
network settings and device (disabled after the transfer)
name simultaneously with
yyDisabled
the settings data transfer.
(default value)
6-21
Saves the image

displayed on the monitor
into the USB memory as
an image data (bmp).
6-23
Displays the run screen

(menu display OFF).

yyOFF
-
5-2
Settings List
Monitor Settings screen

Menu
Sensor Connect
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Selects a connection
method of the sensor and
monitor.
6-46
Direct/Network
Switches the connection

yyDirect Connection
method of the sensor and
yyNetwork Connection
monitor.
6-46
Search Sensor
Searches for sensors on

the network and perform
their connection.
6-46
Specify Sensor
Specifies the IP address

of the sensor to connect.
6-46
Monitor Device Settings
Network
Settings
Display
Settings
Touch
Screen
Lock
6-45
MAC Address
Displays the MAC

address for the monitor.
IP Address
Displays the IP address

of the monitor.
192.168.10.1
(default value)
6-48
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask 255.255.255.0

of the monitor.
(default value)
6-48
Default Gateway
Displays the default

gateway of the monitor.
0.0.0.0
(default value)
6-48
Manual Trigger
Sets the Manual Trigger

to enable/disable.
yyEnable (default value)

yyDisable
6-49
Update Image in RUN

Mode
Sets whether or not

to update an image
during running.

yyOFF
6-49
Tool Auto Tuning Guide
Sets the Tool Auto Tuning yyShow (default value)

Guide to Show/Hide.
yyHide
6-49
Touch Screen Lock
Sets Touch Screen Lock

yyEnable
function to enable/disable. yyDisable (default value)
6-50
Password
Sets a password when

the Touch Screen Lock
function is enabled.
6-50
Up to 8 characters
6-48
A-9
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Monitor Environment
6-45
Language
Selects the language

to be displayed on the
monitor.
Time
Sets date and time.
yyEnglish
yyJapanese
yyDeutsch
yyChinese (Simplified)
yyChinese (Traditional)
yyItalian
yyFrench
yySpanish
yyPortuguese
yyKorean
-
Backlight Brightness
Adjusts the brightness of

backlight on the monitor.
Auto Off
Sets the Auto off function

yyEnable
of backlight on the monitor
yyDisable (default value)
to Enable/Disable.
Auto Off Time Delay
Sets a time until the

back light turns off when
the Auto off function is
enabled.
Backlight
Reference
page
Adjusts the position to be

tapped of the monitor.
1 to 7 (default value: 5)
yy30 sec
yy1 min (default value)
yy5 min
yy10 min
yy30 min
-
System
6-51
6-51
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-45
Displays the model,

version, serial number,
MAC address, and IP
address of the monitor.
6-53
Displays a sensor
information.
6-43
Initialize Monitor
Initializes the settings of

the monitor.
6-53
Update Monitor
Updates the operation software

version of the monitor.
6-53
Monitor Information
Sensor Information
A-10
Settings List
Sensor Advanced screen

Menu
Description
Setting range
Environmental
6-25
IN1
Sets a detection timing of

yyExt. Trigger
the trigger input for IN1
yyExt. Trigger
input line.
IN2 to IN6
Sets a function to the

input line IN2 to IN6.
Option
Sets whether or not to

write data into ROM
yyYes
when the external master
yyNo (default value)
image registration is
performed.
6-26
OUT1 to
OUT4
Sets the output line

settings (OUT1 to 4).
yyN.O.
yyN.C.
6-27
Common
Output
Settings
Selects an output mode.
yyLatching (default value)

yyOne-Shot
6-27
Polarity
Selects the polarity (I/O

format) of the sensor.
yyNPN
yyPNP
6-28
I/O Monitor
Checks whether an input

yyON
line for control is correctly
yyOFF
wired or not.
6-28
Device Name
Up to 16 characters
Sets a name of the sensor. (English and Japanese
6-29
Password
Lock
Sets the Password

Lock function to enable/
disable.
6-30
Password
Sets a password when the Up to 8 characters

Password Lock function of (English and Japanese
the sensor is enabled.
6-30
MAC Address
Displays the MAC

address for the sensor.
6-31
IP Address

of the sensor.
6-31
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask

of the sensor.
6-31
Default Gateway
Displays the default

gateway of the sensor.
6-31
Input
Settings
I/O Settings
Output
Settings
Device
Name/
Pass
Network
Settings
Reference
page
Security
yyOFF
yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save
yyON
6-26
6-26
A-11
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Adv. Network Settings
6-32
Transfers the image
data and status result
yyOFF
information of the sensor yyON
memory to an FTP server.
FTP Client

of the FTP server.
User Name
Input the user name for

Up to 16 characters can
logging in to the FTP server. be set.
6-33
Input the password for

logging in to the FTP server. be set.
6-33
Enables/disables the
passive mode.
6-33
yyEnable
yyDisable
Connection Tests the connection with

Test
the FTP server.
Transfer
Condition
6-34
Selects the transfer

condition of image data.
yyAll
yyNG Only
6-34
File Format
Selects the file saving

format for image data.
yyIVP
yyBMP
6-35
Transfer
Judgment
Results
Transfers judgement
results simultaneously
with the image data.
yyEnable
yyDisable
6-35
FTP Error
Turns ON the Error

output function for when
a file transfer failed.
yyEnable
yyDisable
6-35
Folder
Displays the transfer

destination folder.
be set.
6-35
File Name
Sets the file name of

the image data to be
transferred.
be set.
6-36
0-65535
6-36
Creates subfolders under

yyEnable
the transfer destination
yyDisable
folder.
6-36
Protocol
yyDisable
Selects the communication
yyEtherNet/IP
protocol for the sensor.
yyPROFINET
6-37
Handshake Control
Enables/disables the
yyEnable
handshake control of data. yyDisable
6-37
Create
Subfolder
A-12
6-33
Transfer
Condition
Transfer
Destination
Input the upper limit
Folder
Index
of the numbers to be
Settings
Upper Limit
appended to file names.
Field
Network
6-32
IP Address
FTP
Destination Password
Settings
Passive
Mode
FTP
Reference
page
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Setup Adjustment
Tilt Correction
Image Settings
Rotate 180
Image Settings
White Balance
(Color type only)
Image Settings
Reference
page
6-25
Shapes can be adjusted

to the correct shape if an
image displayed on the
monitor is distorted.

yyVertical
yyHorizontal
6-38
Adjusts imaging for the

Tilt Correction.
Same as Image
Optimization
6-38
Displays the image

by rotating 180.
yyON
6-40

Rotate 180.
Same as Image
Optimization
6-40
Adjusts a white balance

for the built-in camera of
the sensor.
White balance.
Same as Image
Optimization
Program
6-41
6-41
6-25
Select a changing
method for programs.
yyMonitor/PC (default value)

yyExternal IN
6-42
Auto Focus Adj Pos
Sets whether or not

to share the adjusting
position for auto focus to
all programs.
yyCommon
yyIndividual (default value)
6-42
System
6-25
Sensor Information
Displays the model,

version, serial number,
MAC address, IP address,
and device name of the
sensor.
6-43
Initialize Sensor
Initializes the sensor

settings.
6-44
Update Sensor
Updates the operation

software of the sensor.
6-44
A-13
Settings List
Sensor Setup screen

Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Trigger Options
Internal
Trigger interval:
1 to 10000 ms
(default value: 50 ms)
Sets an imaging timing of
a target.
External
Trigger delay:
0 to 1000 ms
(default value: 0 ms)
4-8
Automatically adjusts a
image brightness.
4-11
Adjusts focus of the

sensor.
Manual focusing type

Auto focusing type
yyAutomatic
yyManual
4-12
Sets an imaging area.
yyEntire (default value)

yyPartial
4-17
Bright
Adjusts brightness of an
image manually.
Standard range type

(color)
Standard range type
(monochrome)
Short range type
Long rang type
4-18
Imaging
Mode
Select an imaging mode

of the sensor.
yyNormal (default value)

yyHDR
yyHighGain
4-18
Focus Adjustment
Imaging Area
Advanced
Brightness
Adjustment
Extended
functions
menu
A-14
Lighting
yyOFF
Select a lighting mode for
yyFlash (default value)
the built-in light.
yyContinuous
4-18
Color Filters
(color type only)
Applies the color filters if

an outline of a certain color
OFF (default value),
cannot be displayed when
Red, Green, Blue, Cyan,
an image is displayed in
Magenta, Yellow
monochrome display with
the color type sensor.
4-19
Digital Zoom
(monochrome type only)
Switches the digital zoom yyON

to ON/OFF.
4-19
Settings List
Setting range
Reference
page
Registers the image

imaged by sensor as a
master image.
4-21
Select Img From Image

History
Registers the image of

the image history in the
memory of the sensor as
a master image.
4-22
Select Img From USB

Memory
Registers the image in USB

memory as a master image.
4-24
Brightness Correction
Sets a reference of
brightness to the master
image.
4-26
Setting range
Reference
page
4-31
Menu
Description
Extended
functions
menu
3. Tool Settings
Menu
Description
Add Tool
Newly sets a tool.
Edit
Window
Fine Tune
Outline
Outline
Window
Shape
Select a window shape

to specify an area of the
target to be detected.
yy Rect (default value)

yy Circle
4-33
Search
Region
Specifies an area to
search an outline of the
target.
yyEntire (Without position

adjustment)
yyPartial (With position
adjustment)
4-35
Remove
Outline
Disables an unnecessary
outline which interrupts
yyUndo
the stabilized detection,
yyClear
and then judges.
4-35
Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)

the pen when specifying
yyMiddle
an unnecessary outline.
yyWide
4-35
Select an extraction
sensitivity of an outline.
yyHigh
yyLow
4-36
Adjusts a threshold used

in anomaly detection.
0 to 100
(default value: 70)
4-33
Sets an angle limit for

detecting outlines to the
rotating direction.
0 to 180
(default value: 20)
4-38
Select whether or not to

allow the margin for the
limited angle.

yyOFF
4-38
Select a detection mode

for outline search.
yyHigh Accuracy
yyHigh Speed (default value)
4-38
Eraser
Width
Sensitivity
Limit Adjustment
Rotation
Range
Margin
Extended
functions
menu
Search
Algorithm
Tool Name
Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
the tool.
4-39
A-15
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Window
Shape

to specify the area of a
target to be extracted.

yy Circle
yyEntire
4-42
Mask
Adds a rectangular/
circular mask region in
the tool window frame.
Adds a rectangular/
circular cutting region in
the mask region.
yyAdd Mask
yyCut Mask
4-45
Tap a color to be
extracted on the master
image and sets an
extraction range.
yyExtract Area [+]

yyExtract Area [-]
yyUndo
yyClear
4-42
Edit
Window
Color Extraction
(For color type)
A color range to be
extracted can be set on
to Live Image
the Live image of the
target.
Brightness Extraction
Color
Area/
Area
yyExtraction Range
(0 to 255)
yyUndo
yyClear
4-42
4-42
A brightness range to
be extracted can be set
on the Live image of the
target.
4-42

4-42
Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit of a

threshold.
yyEnable
yyDisable (default value)
4-46
Scale
When an upper limit

is Enable, select a
threshold scale matching
the coincidence range
required for judgment.
yy0-200 (default value)

yy0-999
4-46
Advanced
Color
Extraction
(Color type)
Specifies a color to be
extracted as HSB
(H: Hue, S: Saturation,
B: Brightness).
yyH : 0 to 359
yyS : 0 to 255
yyB : 0 to 255
4-49
Advanced
Brightness
Extended Extraction
functions (Monochrome
type)
menu
Specifies a brightness
value to be extracted.
0 to 255
4-49
to Live Image
Limit Adjustment
Upper
Limit
A-16
Tap brightness to be
extracted on the master
image and sets an
extraction range.
Tool Name
Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
the tool.
4-49
Fixed
Reference
Area
Select a condition which yyDisable

the matching rate of the
yyEnable: Large
Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small
4-50
Settings List
Menu
Edit
Window
Pos.
Adj.
Fine Tune
Outline
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
Window
Shape

to specify an area of the
target to be detected.

yy Circle
4-53
Search
Region
Specifies an area to
search an outline of the
target.
yyEntire
yyPartial
4-55
Remove
Outline
Disables an unnecessary
outline which interrupts
yyUndo
the stabilized detection,
yyClear
and then judges.
4-55
Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)

the pen when specifying
yyMiddle
an unnecessary outline.
yyWide
4-55
Select an extraction
sensitivity of an outline.
yyHigh
yyLow
4-55

4-53
Sets an angle limit for

adjusting position to the
rotating direction.
0 to 180
(default value: 20)
4-57
Select whether or not to

allow the margin for the
limited angle.

yyOFF
4-57
Eraser
Width
Sensitivity
Limit Adjustment
Rotation
Extended Range
functions
menu
Margin
Edit Tool
Edits the settings of the

tool which has already
been set.
4-31
Delete Tool
Deletes an unnecessary
tool.
4-31
Extended
functions
menu
Copies the tool which has

been set and pastes it to
the same position.
This is for the Outline tool
and the Color Area/Area
tool.
4-58
Copy Tool
A-17
Settings List
Menu
Description
Setting range
Reference
page
4-60
OUT1 to OUT4
Sets the output items

to be assigned to the
output line.
yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each
tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result
of each tool
(Logic 1 to Logic 4)
yyOFF (not used)
Trigger Error
Selects whether to
ON/OFF the output
when the trigger error
occurred.
yyON
4-60
Logic
Selects the logical

operation method of
logics.
yyAND
yyOR
4-63
(Tool selection)
Select tools to be
assigned to the logic.
yyUnused
yyUsed
yyUsed (Inverse)
4-63
Selects a condition for

the total status result.
yyAll Tools OK
yyAny Tools OK
yyLogic 1 to 4
4-65
Extended
functions
menu
Logic Settings
(Logic 1 to 4)
Total Status Conditions
A-18
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check point
The PWR/ERR indicator light An error occurred. Check the

of the sensor or the PWR
errors from lighting or blinking
indicator light of the monitor
in red.
is lighting or blinking in red.
An error message is
displayed on the monitor.
The power is not supplied to
the sensor or monitor does
not turn on.
Reference
page
Refer to "Error Message".

A-22
Check the details of the error

message.
Refer to "Error Message".
Is the power cable correctly

connected?
Connect the power cable

correctly.
2-12
Is the voltage or capacity of

the power source meet the
specification?
Use a power source of the

correct rating.
8-2
Is the installed distance of the

target correct?
Place a target at the correct

installed distance. The
installed distance depends on
the sensor type.
2-2
Is the sensor view correct?
Place the sensor in such a way

that the sensor view matches
the target size.
2-2
Is the focus adjustment correct?
Adjust the focusing position

(focus) of the sensor.
4-12
Adjust the brightness of the

sensor.
4-11
Is the brightness adjustment

An image is not displayed on correct?
the monitor, or the image is
Is the target or the sensor
abnormal.
vibrating?
Does the ambient light affect
the image?
Devise anti-vibration measures

etc.
Use brightness correction.
Place the douser to prevent
the incident of ambient light.
A-22
4-26
-
Clean the front cover. Replace

it with the spare front cover
(OP-87461).
A-41
Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update

in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
6-49
Is the front cover dirty or

damaged?
The image or the status

result is not updated.
Remedy
Is the system in the setting

mode?
yyStart the run mode

yyTurn on the power of the
sensor again.
5-2
Is the trigger correctly input?
If a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, input
the external trigger. When the
NPN is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When
PNP is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a voltage
input circuit. Check the cables.
2-12
All or part of the settings

necessary for running have not
been completed.
Complete the settings in

Settings Navigator.
4-1
A-19
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check point
Remedy
The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
but the image is not.
in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
Image update is slow.

(during operation/setting)
The monitor cannot be

operated using the touch
panel.
The network may be affected

by the traffic in the in-plant LAN.
Configure a local network and
Is the network connected to the confirm the network connection
in-plant LAN?
only for the IV Series.
The status result is not

output.
6-49
Is the input screen for the

unlock password displayed?
The touch screen lock of the

monitor or the password lock
of the sensor is enabled. Input
the unlock password.
6-30
6-50
The password is lost and cannot

unlock.
Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.
Is the output line correctly

connected?
Correctly connect to the

external devices.
2-12
Is the output setting correctly

set?
Set the output line and output

settings correctly in the
Settings Navigator.
4-60
Is the system in the setting

mode?
Start the run mode
Is the threshold correctly set?
Set the threshold correctly.
5-14
Is the tool correctly set?
yySet the detection tool correctly.

yySet the position adjustment
tool correctly.
4-28
Is the Polarity correctly set?
Set the NPN or PNP according

to the circuits of the external
devices.
6-28
Set the N.O. (normally open)

Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed)
set?
according to the circuits of the
external devices.
A-20
6-49
Set the function of Update

Image in the RUN mode to OFF.
Are not there any damage or

crack on the touch screen?
Reference
page
5-2
6-27
Troubleshooting
Symptom
An external trigger cannot

be input.
Check point
Image data cannot be

transferred via FTP.
Reference
page
Is the trigger condition set to

[External]?
Select [External] in Trigger

Options.
4-8
Is the input line correctly

connected?

external devices.
2-12
Has the input setting been

made correctly?
Make the input line and input

settings correctly in [Input
Settings].
6-26
Has the Polarity been correctly

set?
When the NPN is selected

in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
circuit. When the PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
6-28
The program number cannot Has the switching method for

be changed with the input
the programs been correctly
line.
set?
The monitor and sensor

cannot be connected to.
Remedy
Set the switching method for

the programs to [External IN].
6-42
Has the input line been

correctly connected?

external devices.
2-12
Has the input setting been

correctly set?
Set the input line and input

settings correctly in [Input
Settings].
6-26
Has the Polarity been correctly

set?
When the NPN is selected

in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
circuit. When the PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
6-28
Check the cables and settings.
Refer to Remedy when the

Monitor cannot be Connected
with the Sensor (Page A-28).
A-28
Check the cables and settings.
Refer to Remedy when data

transfer via FTP is unavailable
A-38
A-21
Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor
The causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor.
PWR/ERR
indicator light
PWR/ERR
indicator
status
ON
Green
Blink
A
ON
Red
Blink
A-22
Cause
Remedy
In operation.
Setting in progress.
Operation stopped.
A system error occurred.
yyTurn on the power of this device.

yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error

occurred.
yyA data abnormality occurred
due to noise or because the
power switched OFF while
writing was in progress.
yyInitialize the settings.

yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A trigger error occurred.

A judgment process is not
performed.
yyIf a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, the
external trigger will be input
during a BUSY status.
yyIf a target is to be imaged
using an internal trigger, the
trigger interval will become
shorter than the processing
time.
yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the

following procedure.
yyNext normal trigger input
yyClear Error input
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status.
yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
that is longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF]
described in output assignment for the Settings
Navigator (Page 4-60).
An external master image

registration error (without
registered master image)
occurred. The master image
is not updated.
yyThe image to be registered
as a master image was not
imaged.
yyThe work memory is
insufficient.
yyAn external master image registration error can be

fixed using one of the following procedures.
yySuccessful next external master image registration
yyClearing the Error input
yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor
yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
and register it as an external master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection tools.
Error Messages
PWR/ERR
indicator
status
Red
Blink
OFF
Cause
Remedy
The external master image

registration error (with
yyAn external master image registration error can be
fixed using one of the following procedures.
occurred. The following
errors occurred even though
yySuccessful next external master image registration
the image was updated and
registered as a master image.
yyFor the new master image,
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
the outline cannot be
yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
extracted with the outline
tool.
detection tools/position adjustment settings are
yyFor the new master image,
applicable.
the area cannot be extracted
with the color area/area tool.
An FTP error occurred. The
following errors occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP
server failed.
yyTranfer to the transfer
destination folder failed.
yyThe transfer speed could
not catch up the sensor
processing speed.
An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following

procedures.
yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
yyClear Error input.
yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
yyPower is not supplied to this

device.
yyDuring focusing position
adjustment.
(Manual focus type only)
yyConnect the power cable correctly.

yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
Cables (Page 2-12)
A-23
Error Messages
Confirming error messages of the monitor

Message
Sensor system error happens.
Turn on sensor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.
Cause
A system error occurred
in the sensor.
yyIt is conceivable that a
fault occurred inside the
sensor.
Sensor internal memory reading

has failed.
Remedy
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
A memory read error

occurred when the
sensor started.
Turn on or initialize sensor.
yyA data trouble occurred.
yyIt is conceivable that
After this message is closed,
[Initialize] button will be displayed. the power was switched
OFF during writing, or
noise was picked up.
yyInitialize the settings following

the instructions on the screen.
again.
yyDo not turn OFF the power
while saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Sensor program xx is damaged.

Initialization is necessary.
yyInitialize the settings following

the instructions on the screen.
again.
yyDo not turn OFF the power
while saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs,
contact your nearest KEYENCE
office.
A memory read error

occurred when the
sensor started.
After this message is closed,
yyA data trouble occurred
[Initialize] button will be displayed. during the execution of
program number xx.
yyIt is conceivable that
the power was switched
OFF during writing, or
noise was picked up.
Trigger error
A-24
A trigger error occurred.

yyAn trigger error can be fixed
Judgment processing has using one of the following
not been executed.
procedure.
yyIf a target is to be
yyNext normal trigger input
imaged using an
external trigger, the
yySwitching the program
external trigger will be
number
input during a BUSY
yyProceeding to the settings
status.
screen of the sensor
yyIf a target is to be
yyDo not input the external trigger
imaged using an
during a BUSY status.
internal trigger, the
yySet the trigger interval of the
trigger interval will
internal trigger to a value that
become shorter than
is longer than the processing
time.
yyAn error will not occur if the
trigger is set to [OFF] described
in output assignment for the
Settings Navigator (Page
4-60).
Output/
Indicator
*1
*1
*1
*2
Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
An external master image yyAn external master image

registration error can be fixed
registration error (with
using one of the following
procedures.
occurred. The following
errors occurred even
yySuccessful next external
master image registration
though the image was
updated and registered
Some tools can not correctly
as a master image.
judged because area is 0 as a
number
yyFor the new master
result of Ext. Master Save.
image, the outline
(Matching rate is 0.)
cannot be extracted
Check tool configuration.
with the outline tool.
yyChecking that the image to be
registered and the detection
Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master
image, the area cannot
tools/position adjustment
area is not adjustable as a result of
be extracted with the
settings are applicable.
Ext. Master Save.
Color Area/Area tool.
yyAdjusting the brightness of the
Check configuration of brightness
image to be registered properly.
yyThe brightness
adjustment.
correction cannot be
performed correctly for
the new master image.
Output/
Indicator
Some tools can not correctly judge

because of insufficient outline
extraction amount as a result of
Ext. Master Save.
(Matching rate is 0.)
Check tool configuration.
Outer master registration fails

because image is not captured.
Outer master registration fails

because of lack of work memory.
An external master image yyAn external master image

registration error (with no
registration error can be fixed
using one of the following
occurred. The master
procedures.
image is not updated.
yySuccessful in next external
master image registration
yyThe image to be
registered as a master
image was not imaged.
number
yyThe work memory is
insufficient.
yyTaking an image to be
registered as a mater image
and registering it as an external
master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.
Monitor fatal error (XXX) occurred. A system error occurred

yyTurn on the monitor power again.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE
in the monitor.
yyIf the same error occurs,
office.
contact your nearest KEYENCE
yyIt is conceivable that a
fault occurred inside the office.
Monitor system error happens.
monitor.
*2
*2
*3
Turn on monitor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.
A-25
Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
Connecting to sensor
Connection is not possible Refer to Remedy when the

because there is no
Monitor cannot be Connected
response from the sensor. with the Sensor (Page A-28).
Connecting to sensor
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)
Connection is not
possible because there
is no response from the
sensor with the specified
IP address.
Output/
Indicator
*4
Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible

because there is no
happens.
response from the sensor.
Data transfer to sensor fails.
Connection is not possible

because data transmission
to the sensor has failed.
Specified sensor is being

Connection is not possible
Disconnect the presently
connected to other PC or monitor. because the specified sensor connected monitor or PC and
is connected to a different
then re-connect it.
monitor or a different PC.
Only one monitor or PC can
be connected to a sensor at
the same time.
Writing in file fails.
File saving to the USB

memory failed.
Replace the USB memory.
Access to file or folder fails.
Access to the USB

memory failed.
yyFormat the USB memory.

yyReplace the USB memory.
Data saving has failed.

If it happens repeatedly:
yyReplace USB memory.
yyFormat USB memory.
The USB memory is

broken.
Disk space is insufficient.
Saving is not possible

because the amount of
free space of the USB
memory is insufficient.
A-26
Increase the amount of free

space by deleting files in the USB
memory or by formatting.
*4
Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
This file configuration data is for

xxxx.
This file is not readable.
The setting files for a

Read the setting files of a sensor
different model of sensors of the same model.
cannot be read.
FTP Connection Error
Connection with the FTP

server failed.
FTP Transfer Error

(Transfer Failed)
Data transfer to the

transfer destination folder
failed.
FTP Transfer Error

(Insufficient Data Buffer)
Data which is larger than

the remaining storage of
the FTP buffer has been
created and the transfer
failed.
Output/
Indicator
Remedy when data

Refer to
transfer via FTP is unavailable
(Page A-38).
*2
*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)
*3 PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*4 SENSOR indicator light of the monitor: Off
A-27
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected

with the Sensor
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
Status
Remedy
Retries occur repeatedly because

connection is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.
yySupply power to the sensor.

yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
Connecting directly (Page 2-16)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a
retry, the run screen opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has been established.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above

remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-40)
A
yyThe error (381) "Data transfer to sensor
fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly

with a monitor cable.
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
yyIn the case of a network connection, change the
configuration to network connection.
When connecting with the sensor via a network
(Page 6-46)
The network is connected to other network
devices such as multiple sensors or
computers.
A-28
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable

Status
Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
Connecting via network (Page 2-16)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
retry, the run screen opens automatically.
Retries occur repeatedly because

connection is not possible after the power is
turned on.
The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]

button or [OK] button is tapped.
yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has

established.
yyAn error (381) "Data transfer to sensor

fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-47)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by searching for the
sensor (Page A-30).
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor.
Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the
sensor (Page 6-48)
When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the
sensor (Page A-31).
A-29
Status
Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
searching for the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
The sensor was not found using the [Search

Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect
screen.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not

coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-36)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of
the monitor or other devices. Also, reset (initialize) the
network setting for the sensor.
When directly connecting with the sensor (Page 6-46)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-37)
(Page A-40)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful

sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and monitor are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address
is not duplicated.
A-30
Status
Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
specifying the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a

connection using the [Search Sensor] button.
Connection is not possible using the [Specify
Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network
Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on
(Page 6-47)
the Sensor Connect screen.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-36)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the
monitor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet
mask and the default gateway.
Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
When directly connecting with the sensor (Page 6-46)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-37)
(Page A-40)
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.
Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-47)
When the
connection cannot be established by searching for the
sensor (Page A-30).
First connection after purchasing, or

connection after monitor initialization.
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect.

Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor
(Page 6-48)
When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor
(Page A-31).
A-31
Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor

LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light
Displays the link status with the network.
LINK/ACT indicator
light
Status of the
LINK/ACT
indicator light
Remedy
ON
Correct link with the monitor

or the Ethernet switch.
Blink
Correct link with the monitor

or the Ethernet switch.
Data are being sent and
received.
Green
OFF
A-32
Status
Link is normal.
When connection with the monitor is not possible, check
the STATUS indicator light.
No correct link with the

monitor or the Ethernet
yySupply power to the sensor.
switch.
yySupply power to the monitor or the Ethernet switch of
yyPower is not supplied to this
the connection target.
unit or the connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.
yyThe cable is not connected
correctly.
STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS
indicator light.
STATUS indicator
light
Status of
the STATUS
indicator light
ON
Green
Blink
OFF
Status
Remedy
Correct connection with the

monitor.
The connection with the
monitor has been established
by acquiring the IP address.
No correct connection with the

monitor.
The IP address of the sensor
has been acquired, but
connection with the monitor
has not been established.
For direct connection

(Page A-28)
For network connection
(Page A-29)

(Page
A-28)
monitor.
The IP address of the sensor For network connection
has not been acquired.
(Page A-29)
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the monitor screen may fail to be updated while
the STATUS indicator light turned on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected monitor cannot be connected.
A-33
Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor
The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor.
SENSOR indicator light
Status of
the SENSOR
indicator light
ON
Green
Blink
OFF
Status
Remedy
Correct connection with the

sensor.
sensor.
The link with the sensor or
the Ethernet switch has been
established, but connection
with the sensor has not been
established.

(Page A-28)
(Page A-29)

yySupply power to the monitor.
sensor.
yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of
The link with the sensor or the
the connection target.
Ethernet switch has not been
yyConnect the cable correctly.
established.
yyThe communication timeout interval is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the
SENSOR indicator light in on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.
A-34
Other methods of confirming

a network connection
3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose

existence is to be confirmed and tap the
[Ping Test] button.
Confirming the existence of the sensor

from the monitor
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can
be confirmed by performing a test communication
from the monitor to the sensor to be connected.
1 Displays the Sensor Connect screen.
The confirmation result will be displayed on the

monitor.
When the confirmation result is OK

zz
When the confirmation result is NG
zz
For the first startup of the monitor or after

zz
monitor initialization

If not connected with the sensor via a

zz
network
Automatically opens after the power is turned on.
If connected with the sensor via a network

zz
network (Page 6-46)
When the monitor and the sensor are connected
via a network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.
2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.
If the displayed confirmation result is
NG
Confirm the following contents.

yySupply power to the sensor and the network
equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the
network equipment.
y
Correctly
set the IP address, the subnet mask,
y
and the default gateway of the monitor and
sensor.
(Page 3-8)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
monitor (Page A-36)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor (Page A-37)
The existence confirmation function utilizes the ping
command. Note that even when this is executed
for devices other than a sensor, confirmation will
succeed if there is a response to the ping command.
A-35

the monitor
1 Open the Monitor Device Settings screen.
If not connected with the sensor via

zz
network
After the power turned on, the Sensor Connect

screen opens automatically. Tap the [Monitor
Device Settings] button.
If connected with the sensor via a network

zz
Monitor Settings (Page 6-45)
2 Tap the [Network Settings] button.
4 After confirmation/setting is completed,

yyIf the setting has not been changed, system

returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
yyIf the setting has been changed, the message
"Monitor will be restarted." appears.
5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been

changed.
If the monitor could be connected with the

zz
sensor
The run screen opens.
If the monitor could not be connected with

zz
the sensor
The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the

connection method etc. and connect the monitor
with the sensor.
Sensor Connect (Page 6-45)
The monitor network setting screen opens.
3 Confirm the IP address of the monitor.
For details of the connection method after initial

startup of the monitor or after monitor initialization
(Page 3-13), refer to
Operation for initial startup
of the monitor (Network Connection) (Page 3-7).
To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button

and display the editing screen. Set an arbitrary
address and tap the [OK] button.
A-36

the sensor
5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.
Directly connect the sensor and monitor, and

confirm the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to the network connection, set
the confirmed IP address of the sensor, and then
confirm whether or not to connect with the sensor.
1 Directly connect the monitor and the
sensor of the confirmation/setting target.

(Page 6-46)

(Page 6-7)
3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.
yyTapping the [Edit] button displays the screen

to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address
yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup
values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and
[Default Gateway] will be reset and nothing will
be set. Again, set an arbitrary address.
6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap

the [OK] button and exit from the network
settings.
7 Turn OFF the power and connect the

sensor and monitor via a network.
8 Turn on the power.
If the monitor could be connected with the

zz
sensor
The run screen opens.

the [Network Settings] button.
If the monitor could not be connected with

zz
the sensor
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the

connection method etc. and connect with the
sensor.
Remedy when connection via a network is
Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following
port is opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
For the setting methods of the sensor port
number, refer to the following.
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.
A-37
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable

Status
Remedy
Connection with the FTP server failed.
yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it

correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it
correctly. Moreover, confirm the firewall software on the
PC whether the port is available or not.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-33)
Data transfer to the transfer destination

folder failed.
yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder

is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the
transfer destination folder and perform the operation
again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the
transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a
file with the same name exists, change the file name or
change the transfer destination folder.
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-35)
yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the
[Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program]
screen after the transfer of untransferred data has
finished.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the

transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will
appear.
A-38
Status
Remedy
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.
A-39

The network settings such as the IP address can
be initialized to the factory default by means of the
IP reset switch of the sensor.
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor used in another network to a new network,
or when trouble occurs during connection.
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor.
The connection will be interrupted.
Setting Items
Settings after
initialization
Communication speed
100/10Mbps
Automatically switches
IP Address
BOOTP
(Bootstrap Protocol)
0.0.0.0*1, *2
*2
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0*2
1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover

indicated by the
Remove only the fixing screw of the front

cover indicated by the
mark. Do not remove
the front cover.
mark
2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in
diameter) into the screw hole and press

the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.
*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP

client function can be used.
Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP
server or DHCP server except the monitor to be
connected.
*2 In the Network Settings screen of the sensor,
[Empty] is displayed.

Connecting method after initialization

Connects automatically with BOOTP. There is

no need to set the IP address.
(Page 6-46)
Long and
thin pin
The STATUS indicator light will blink twice

(orange) and then turn off.
The network setting is initialized.
3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.

Search for the sensor to be connected. Search

will be made for a sensor without IP address, set
the IP address by following the instructions on
the screen.
network (Page 6-46)
A-40
mark.
Indicator light
Settings after initialization
IP address setting
method
Initializing the network settings
Maintenance
Maintenance
Attaching the protection sheet
A protection sheet (OP-87463) can be attached to
protect the LCD panel.
1 Remove the backing film (transparent)

from the back and front sides of the
protection sheet.
Replacing the front cover

The front cover can be replaced with the optional
spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or
damaged.
Replace the front cover with the correct
procedure by following the precautions
below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67)
may not be maintained.
yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring.
yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.
1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.
O-shaped ring (small)

Backing film
(back)
O-shaped ring (large)
Adhesive side
(back of the protection
sheet)
Protection sheet
Backing film (front)
Front cover
Dedicated screw
2 Apply the protection sheet on the monitor

display with the tab at the lower right.
2 Install the front cover after embedding the

O-shaped ring.
yyScrew: Dedicated screw 2

Use the attached dedicated screw.
O-shaped ring (small)
Tab
O-shaped ring (large)
Protection sheet
Apply the protection film while make sure that

no trash tucked in.
Dedicated screw
Front cover
A-41
Index
Index
Numerics
1. Image Optimization....................................... A-14

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).....4-6
2. Master Registration....................................... A-15
2. Master Registration (Registering
an Image as a Reference for Judgment)............4-20
3. Tool Settings.................................................. A-15
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28
4. Output Assignment........................................ A-18
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60
Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-33

If the brightness cannot be adjusted due to
uneven brightness........................................5-33
If the brightness cannot be adjusted in
the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-33
Achieving good focus.........................................5-34
the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-34
Adding a tool......................................................4-31
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool............................4-31
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-36
Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-32
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.......................4-18
Advanced Brightness Extraction........................4-49
Advanced Network Settings...............................6-32
Attaching the protection sheet........................... A-41
Auto Brightness Adjustment...............................4-11
(auto focus type only).........................................6-42
B
Backing up in a batch.........................................6-19
Backlight.............................................................6-52
Basic adjustments........................... 5-37, 5-38, 5-39
Basic configurations of IV Series..........................1-2
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Bracket......................................................... 1-9, 8-9
Brightness correction..........................................4-26
A-42
Cables................................................................2-12
Cancelling One-Shot output.................................7-6
saving to the USB memory.................................6-23
Capturing the screen..........................................6-23
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8
Changing Over.....................................................7-7
the image history................................................6-17
Changing the timing of the status output..............7-6
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-22
Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8
Checking the view and installed distance.............2-2
Clearing Errors...................................................7-10
Clearing the saved images.................................6-16
Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-40
Color Filters (color type only).............................4-19
Communication Cable........................................1-12
Confirming error messages of the monitor........ A-24
Confirming or deleting
the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning....5-25
the monitor........................................................ A-36
the sensor.......................................................... A-37
Confirming the existence of
the sensor from the monitor.............................. A-35
If the displayed confirmation result is NG.... A-35
Confirming the router settings........................... A-37
Confirming the status by
observing the indicator light of the sensor......... A-32
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor........ A-34
Connecting directly.............................................2-16
Connecting method after initialization............... A-40
For direct connection................................... A-40
For network connection............................... A-40
Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors......1-3
Connecting the monitor and single sensor...........1-2
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable....2-17
Connecting the power cable of the monitor........2-15
Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor....2-12
Connecting the sensor and monitor...................2-16
Connecting via network......................................2-16
Connection Cable...............................................8-13
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2
Copying a program.............................................6-12
Copy Tool............................................................4-58
Correcting the distorted images due to the
installation..........................................................5-33
Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5
Index
Default value......................................................4-60
Deleting a tool....................................................4-31
Device name......................................................6-29
Device settings...................................................6-29
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-19
Dimensions...........................................................8-6
DIN mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12
Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result at
the time of position adjustment............................ A-4
Displaying from the run screen................. 6-14, 6-18
Displaying from
the Sensor setup menu screen................ 6-14, 6-18
Displaying the histogram....................................5-12
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen.....6-14
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...............4-5
Displaying the statistical information..................5-10
Displaying the USB Memory screen...................6-18
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66
Display methods for tools.....................................5-7
For color type..................................................5-7
For monochrome type.....................................5-8
Display Settings..................................................6-49
Dome attachment......................................... 1-8, 8-7
E
Editing a program name.....................................6-12
Editing a tool.......................................................4-31
Editing the tool window.......................................3-15
Editing the value with the slider..........................3-14
Enabling the screen capturing function..............6-23
Enlarging the image display.................................5-6
Environmental....................................................6-25
Error Messages................................................. A-22
Ethernet cable....................................................8-13
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-12
Exiting the sensor settings and starting an
operation..............................................................5-2
Extended functions for the Image Optimization....4-16
Extended functions for the Master Registration....4-22
Extended functions for the Outline tool..............4-37
Extended functions for the Output Assignment....4-62
the Position Adjustment tool...............................4-57
Extended functions for the Tool settings.............4-58
Extended functions items for the Output
Assignment.........................................................4-62
Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool....4-48
External trigger.....................................................7-2
Field Network.....................................................6-37
Finishing by completing all steps..........................4-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5
Finishing without completing the step..................4-5
Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-50
Flow in the Settings Navigator..............................4-2
Flow of the internal process...............................5-40
Focus Adjustment...............................................4-12
Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-12
Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type....4-14
Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-24
For the processing time......................................5-40
Front cover...........................................................8-8
Front cover (for replacement)...............................1-9
FTP.....................................................................6-32
FTP Destination Settings....................................6-33
H
Hanging on the hook............................................2-8
Hiding the histogram..........................................5-13
Hiding the statistical information.........................5-11
I
Imaging Area......................................................4-17
Imaging the target widely...................................5-32
Importing the individual status output of
each detection tool/logic.......................................7-5
Importing the Status Output.................................7-4
Importing the total status output...........................7-4
Infrared polarization filter attachment...................1-8
Initialize Monitor.................................................6-53
Initializing a program..........................................6-13
Initializing the monitor.........................................3-13
Initializing the network settings.......................... A-40
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40
Initializing the sensor................................ 3-12, 6-44
Input circuit.........................................................2-14
Input Response Time.........................................7-12
Description for symbols................................7-12
Response time for the error clear input........7-12
Response time for the external master
registration input...........................................7-12
Response time for
the switch program input...............................7-12
Input Settings.....................................................6-26
Inputting characters............................................3-16
Installed distance of the dome attachment...........2-6
Installing/Removing the USB memory................6-18
Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-35
Installing the USB memory.................................6-18
A-43
Index
Intelligent Monitor.............................. 1-10, 8-4, 8-10

Internal trigger......................................................7-3
I/O Monitor..........................................................6-28
I/O Settings.........................................................6-26
Items of extended functions for the Image
Optimization.......................................................4-16
Items of extended functions for the Master
Registration........................................................4-22
the Tool settings..................................................4-58
IV Series...............................................................1-4
J
Judgment processing flow....................................1-6
L
Language...........................................................6-51
Lighting...............................................................4-18
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-32
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2
Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-15
Logic Settings.....................................................4-63
M
Main screen for the Image Optimization...............4-7
Main screen for the Master Registration............4-20
Main screen for the Output Assignment.............4-60
Main screen for the Tool Settings.......................4-30
Maintenance...................................................... A-41
Mask settings.....................................................4-45
Master image registration from
the image history in the sensor..........................4-22
Matching rate at the time of protrusion................ A-5
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Menu Screen........................................................5-4
Monitor...............................................................1-15
Monitor cable......................................................8-13
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)..................1-12
Monitor Device Settings.....................................6-45
Monitor Environment..........................................6-45
Monitor Information............................................6-53
Monitor power cable...........................................8-12
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)......1-10
Monitor Settings.................................................6-45
Monitor Settings screen....................................... A-9
Mounting adapter......................................... 1-9, 8-8
Mounting the attachment......................................2-6
Mounting the dome attachment............................2-6
Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8
Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-4
Mounting from the jig side...............................2-4
A-44
Mounting on the wall.......................................2-4

Mounting the sensor.............................................2-4
Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter....2-4
Mounting to a panel............................................2-10
Mounting to a wall................................................2-8
Mounting to the DIN rail......................................2-11
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter...............2-11
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter.............2-8
N
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13
Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-13
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen......5-4
Network Settings...................................... 6-31, 6-48
No-voltage input
(When the NPN output is selected)....................2-14
O
Operating in the shortest cycle.............................7-3
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-16
Operation flow when the power is turned on........3-5
(Direct Connection)..............................................3-6
(Network Connection)...........................................3-7
Operation for initial startup of the sensor...........3-11
Operation of the indicator light...........................1-14
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on...........................................................7-11
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Optional parts for the monitor................... 1-10, 8-12
Optional parts for the sensor........................ 1-8, 8-7
Other methods of confirming
a network connection........................................ A-35
Outline tool.........................................................4-32
Output circuit......................................................2-14
Output Settings...................................................6-27
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Overview of the program functions.......................6-8
Index
P
Panel cutting dimension.....................................2-10
Panel mounting adapter............................1-11, 8-12
Password Lock...................................................6-30
Polarity...............................................................6-28
Polarized visible light filter attachment.................1-8
Polarizing filter attachment...................................8-8
Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-51
Power I/O cable....................................................8-8
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)...........1-9
Preparation flow...................................................6-9
Preparation procedures........................................6-9
Preparing the program functions..........................6-9
Processing during an operation..........................5-36
Program..............................................................6-25
Program Switch Method.....................................6-42
Protection sheet....................................... 1-10, 8-12
R
Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-36
Reducing the image blur....................................5-34
Reducing the shininess of
the glossy or metal surface................................5-35
Registering from the image in
the USB memory................................................4-24
When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-24
When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-25
the file saved in the USB memory......................5-22
the image history saved in the sensor................5-20
Registering the images taken in the Test mode....5-18
Registering the master image............................4-21
Registering the Master Image..............................7-8
Registering the OK/NG images to be used for
the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-18
Remedy when connection via a network is
unavailable........................................................ A-29
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable.... A-28
Connected with the Sensor............................... A-28
Removing the USB memory...............................6-18
Replacing the front cover.................................. A-41
Rotate 180........................................................6-40
Rotation Range........................................ 4-38, 4-57
RUN screen (menu display OFF)........................ A-6
RUN screen (menu display ON).......................... A-6
S
Saving the image history individually.................6-20
Saving the Sensor Settings or
Images to the USB Memory...............................6-18

the image history................................................6-19
Search Algorithm................................................4-38
Searching for a sensor to be connected...............3-8
Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7
Selecting a tool according to
its intended purpose...........................................4-28
Selecting the file in the USB memory.................3-17
Selecting the tool................................................5-41
Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor.....5-6
Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.........5-6
Selecting the tool whose
information to be displayed..................................5-6
Sensor..........................................1-8, 1-13, 8-2, 8-6
Sensor Advanced screen.................................. A-11
Sensor advanced settings..................................6-25
Sensor Connect........................................ 6-45, 6-46
When connecting with
the sensor via a network...............................6-46
When directly connecting with the sensor....6-46
whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-14
Sensor Information.............................................6-43
Sensor Setup Menu screen................................. A-7
Sensor Setup screen......................................... A-14
Setting a search region............................ 4-35, 4-55
Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-36, 4-56
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-40
Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-32
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-52
Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-60
Settings after initialization.................................. A-40
Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-35, 4-55
Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8
Settings List......................................................... A-6
Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow......4-4
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-42
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25
Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6
Setting the network address of the monitor..........3-7
Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-33
Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-61
Setting the Position Adjustment tool...................4-53
Setting the Trigger Options......................... 4-8, 4-10
Setting the upper limit.........................................4-46
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12
Setup Adjustment...............................................6-25
Shortening the imaging processing time............5-41
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40
Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-41
the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-42
A-45
Index

the Outline tool...................................................5-41
the position adjustment......................................5-42
Specification of I/O circuit and
current of the sensor..........................................2-14
Specifications.......................................................8-2
Specifying sensor to be connected by
IP address..........................................................3-10
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target
position...............................................................5-36
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-39
If the area search becomes unstable due to
unwanted colors being extracted..................5-39
If the color to be judged cannot be detected....5-39
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
taking a clear image of the target.......................5-32
Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-38
If the detection becomes unstable due to
the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target.....................................5-38
If the match rate difference between
the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-39
If the outline cannot be detected
when the target becomes out of position......5-38
If the outline of the target cannot be
detected........................................................5-39
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be
detected........................................................5-39
Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-37
cannot be detected.......................................5-38
unstable due to the effect of
the unwanted outlines...................................5-37
adjustment becomes unstable......................5-37
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning........5-16
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3
STATUS indicator light....................................... A-33
Status table......................................................... A-2
Stylus........................................................ 1-10, 8-12
Switching the display to the full-screen mode......5-5
System..................................................... 6-25, 6-45
System Configuration...........................................1-2
T
Things can be performed with the program
functions...............................................................6-8
Tilt Correction.....................................................6-38
Time....................................................................6-51
A-46

Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information..........................................................5-26
Tool name................................................. 4-39, 4-49
Tool settings.......................................................5-36
Total Status Conditions.......................................4-65
Touch Panel Calibration.....................................6-52
Touch Screen Lock.............................................6-50
Transfer Condition Settings................................6-34
Transfer Destination Folder Settings..................6-35
Transferring the settings backed up in the USB
memory to the sensor.........................................6-21
Trigger number...................................................5-10
Troubleshooting................................................. A-19
Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2
Types of tools.....................................................4-28
U
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter......2-11
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter........2-9
Unmounting the sensor........................................2-5
Update Monitor...................................................6-53
Updating the sensor...........................................6-44
USB memory (1GB)............................................1-10
Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-4
Useful features while running...............................6-2
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-35
Using the digital zooming function......................5-32
Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-35
Using the image files saved in
the USB memory................................................5-15
Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-15
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-15
Using the polarizing filter attachment......... 2-7, 5-35
Using the program functions (changing over)....6-10
When the [External IN] is selected in the
Program Switch Method...............................6-11
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
the Program Switch Method.........................6-10
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-4
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-5
V
Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)....................2-14
W
Wall mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12
When the NPN output is selected......................2-14
When the PNP output is selected.......................2-14
White Balance (for color type only)....................6-41
Index
MEMO
A-47
Revision history
Revision history Edition number
Revision details
January, 2012
1st edition
May, 2012
2nd edition
Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter.

Revision for German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
Revision for Tool Auto Tuning by registration information file.
August, 2012
3rd edition
Corresponds to the simulator function of the IV-Navigator.
December, 2012
4th edition
Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.

Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output.
Addition of the FTP client function.
Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).
December, 2013
5th edition
Ethernet and Monitor cable changed
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models
or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole
option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be
defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but
not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
(2)
suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended
use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3)
The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH
NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY
RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED
ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES,
OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may
not apply.
BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:
If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets
and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244002E 1123-5 206GB Printed in Japan

Keyence IV Series

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Keyence IV Series

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

206GB

Read this manual before use.

(Setting the Judgment Condition)

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety precautions on LED product

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Version of the IV Series

Version of the IV Series

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

The initial version.

The processing time has been speeded up.

This is the version of this document.

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)

The initial version.

Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).

Compatibility with German.

This is the version of this document.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Structure of This Manual

Structure of This Manual

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview

This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor,

This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow

This chapter explains how to set the sensors using

This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.

This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.

This chapter explains how the input and output terminals

This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.

This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-12

Chapter 2 Installation and Connection

Mounting from the jig side......................2-4

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting

Installed distance of the dome

(When the NPN output is selected).....2-14

(When the PNP output is selected)......2-14

When the PNP output is selected........2-14

Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-15

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator

Registering the master image.........................4-21

Settings for disabling outlines..............4-35